xref: /linux/include/net/mac80211.h (revision 4201c9260a8d3c4ef238e51692a7e9b4e1e29efe)
1 /*
2  * mac80211 <-> driver interface
3  *
4  * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
5  * Copyright 2006-2007	Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
6  * Copyright 2007-2010	Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
7  * Copyright 2013-2014  Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
8  * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH
9  * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2019 Intel Corporation
10  *
11  * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
12  * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
13  * published by the Free Software Foundation.
14  */
15 
16 #ifndef MAC80211_H
17 #define MAC80211_H
18 
19 #include <linux/bug.h>
20 #include <linux/kernel.h>
21 #include <linux/if_ether.h>
22 #include <linux/skbuff.h>
23 #include <linux/ieee80211.h>
24 #include <net/cfg80211.h>
25 #include <net/codel.h>
26 #include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h>
27 #include <asm/unaligned.h>
28 
29 /**
30  * DOC: Introduction
31  *
32  * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
33  * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
34  * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
35  * drivers.
36  */
37 
38 /**
39  * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
40  *
41  * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
42  * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
43  * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
44  * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
45  * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
46  * tasklet function.
47  *
48  * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
49  *	 use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
50  */
51 
52 /**
53  * DOC: Warning
54  *
55  * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
56  * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
57  */
58 
59 /**
60  * DOC: Frame format
61  *
62  * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
63  * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
64  * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
65  * hardware.
66  *
67  * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
68  *
69  * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
70  * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
71  *
72  * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
73  * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
74  */
75 
76 /**
77  * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
78  *
79  * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
80  * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
81  * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
82  * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
83  *
84  * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
85  * suspend.
86  *
87  * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
88  *
89  */
90 
91 /**
92  * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
93  *
94  * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
95  * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
96  * between different stations/interfaces.
97  * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
98  * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
99  * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
100  *
101  * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
102  * driver operation.
103  *
104  * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with
105  * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and
106  * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
107  *
108  * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
109  * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
110  *
111  * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame from a
112  * txq, it calls ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a
113  * queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
114  *
115  * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to
116  * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to
117  * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls
118  * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using
119  * ieee80211_return_txq().
120  *
121  * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
122  * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
123  * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
124  * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
125  * .release_buffered_frames().
126  * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
127  * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
128  * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
129  */
130 
131 struct device;
132 
133 /**
134  * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
135  *
136  * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
137  * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
138  */
139 enum ieee80211_max_queues {
140 	IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES =		16,
141 	IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP =	BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
142 };
143 
144 #define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE	0xff
145 
146 /**
147  * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
148  * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
149  * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
150  * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
151  * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
152  */
153 enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
154 	IEEE80211_AC_VO		= 0,
155 	IEEE80211_AC_VI		= 1,
156 	IEEE80211_AC_BE		= 2,
157 	IEEE80211_AC_BK		= 3,
158 };
159 
160 /**
161  * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
162  *
163  * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
164  * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
165  *
166  * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
167  * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
168  *	2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
169  * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
170  * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
171  * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
172  * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
173  * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured
174  * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE
175  */
176 struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
177 	u16 txop;
178 	u16 cw_min;
179 	u16 cw_max;
180 	u8 aifs;
181 	bool acm;
182 	bool uapsd;
183 	bool mu_edca;
184 	struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec;
185 };
186 
187 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
188 	unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
189 	unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
190 	unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
191 	unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
192 };
193 
194 /**
195  * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
196  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
197  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
198  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
199  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
200  *	this is used only with channel switching with CSA
201  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
202  */
203 enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
204 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH		= BIT(0),
205 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS	= BIT(1),
206 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR		= BIT(2),
207 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL	= BIT(3),
208 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH	= BIT(4),
209 };
210 
211 /**
212  * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
213  *
214  * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
215  * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
216  *
217  * @def: the channel definition
218  * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
219  * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
220  *	active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
221  * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
222  *	after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
223  *	this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
224  * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
225  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
226  *	sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
227  */
228 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
229 	struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
230 	struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
231 
232 	u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
233 
234 	bool radar_enabled;
235 
236 	u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
237 };
238 
239 /**
240  * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
241  * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
242  *	exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
243  *	needs to be switched from one to the other.
244  * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
245  *      to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
246  *      will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
247  *      from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
248  *      implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
249  *      hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
250  *      will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
251  *      for changes/removal.)
252  */
253 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
254 	CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
255 	CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
256 };
257 
258 /**
259  * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
260  *
261  * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
262  * needs to switch from one chanctx to another.  The
263  * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
264  * done.
265  *
266  * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
267  * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
268  * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
269  */
270 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
271 	struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
272 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
273 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
274 };
275 
276 /**
277  * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
278  *
279  * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
280  * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
281  *
282  * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
283  *	also implies a change in the AID.
284  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
285  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
286  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
287  * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
288  * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
289  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
290  * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
291  *	reason (IBSS and managed mode)
292  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
293  *	new beacon (beaconing modes)
294  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
295  *	enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
296  * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
297  * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
298  * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
299  * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
300  *	that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
301  * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
302  * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
303  * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
304  * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
305  * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
306  * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
307  *	changed
308  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
309  *	currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
310  * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
311  *	note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
312  *	context had been assigned.
313  * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
314  * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
315  * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected
316  *	keep alive) changed.
317  * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface
318  * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fime timing reasurement request responder
319  *	functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode).
320  * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed
321  *
322  */
323 enum ieee80211_bss_change {
324 	BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC		= 1<<0,
325 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT	= 1<<1,
326 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE	= 1<<2,
327 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT		= 1<<3,
328 	BSS_CHANGED_HT			= 1<<4,
329 	BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES		= 1<<5,
330 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT		= 1<<6,
331 	BSS_CHANGED_BSSID		= 1<<7,
332 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON		= 1<<8,
333 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED	= 1<<9,
334 	BSS_CHANGED_CQM			= 1<<10,
335 	BSS_CHANGED_IBSS		= 1<<11,
336 	BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER		= 1<<12,
337 	BSS_CHANGED_QOS			= 1<<13,
338 	BSS_CHANGED_IDLE		= 1<<14,
339 	BSS_CHANGED_SSID		= 1<<15,
340 	BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP	= 1<<16,
341 	BSS_CHANGED_PS			= 1<<17,
342 	BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER		= 1<<18,
343 	BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS		= 1<<19,
344 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO		= 1<<20,
345 	BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH		= 1<<21,
346 	BSS_CHANGED_OCB                 = 1<<22,
347 	BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS		= 1<<23,
348 	BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE		= 1<<24,
349 	BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE		= 1<<25,
350 	BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER	= 1<<26,
351 	BSS_CHANGED_TWT			= 1<<27,
352 
353 	/* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
354 };
355 
356 /*
357  * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
358  * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
359  * filtering will be disabled.
360  */
361 #define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
362 
363 /**
364  * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
365  * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
366  * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
367  * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
368  * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
369  *	they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
370  *	once each time the timeout triggers.
371  */
372 enum ieee80211_event_type {
373 	RSSI_EVENT,
374 	MLME_EVENT,
375 	BAR_RX_EVENT,
376 	BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
377 };
378 
379 /**
380  * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
381  * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
382  * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
383  */
384 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
385 	RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
386 	RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
387 };
388 
389 /**
390  * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
391  * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
392  */
393 struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
394 	enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
395 };
396 
397 /**
398  * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
399  * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
400  * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
401  * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
402  * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
403  */
404 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
405 	AUTH_EVENT,
406 	ASSOC_EVENT,
407 	DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
408 	DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
409 };
410 
411 /**
412  * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
413  * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
414  * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
415  * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
416  */
417 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
418 	MLME_SUCCESS,
419 	MLME_DENIED,
420 	MLME_TIMEOUT,
421 };
422 
423 /**
424  * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
425  * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
426  * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
427  * @reason: the reason code if applicable
428  */
429 struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
430 	enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
431 	enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
432 	u16 reason;
433 };
434 
435 /**
436  * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
437  * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
438  * @tid: the tid
439  * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
440  */
441 struct ieee80211_ba_event {
442 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
443 	u16 tid;
444 	u16 ssn;
445 };
446 
447 /**
448  * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
449  * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
450  * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
451  * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
452  * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
453  * @u:union holding the fields above
454  */
455 struct ieee80211_event {
456 	enum ieee80211_event_type type;
457 	union {
458 		struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
459 		struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
460 		struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
461 	} u;
462 };
463 
464 /**
465  * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
466  *
467  * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
468  *
469  * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
470  * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
471  */
472 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
473 	u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
474 	u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
475 };
476 
477 /**
478  * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters
479  *
480  * @lci: LCI subelement content
481  * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content
482  * @lci_len: LCI data length
483  * @civicloc_len: Civic data length
484  */
485 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params {
486 	const u8 *lci;
487 	const u8 *civicloc;
488 	size_t lci_len;
489 	size_t civicloc_len;
490 };
491 
492 /**
493  * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
494  *
495  * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
496  * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
497  *
498  * @bss_color: 6-bit value to mark inter-BSS frame, if BSS supports HE
499  * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE
500  * @multi_sta_back_32bit: supports BA bitmap of 32-bits in Multi-STA BACK
501  * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP
502  * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either
503  *	ACK, BACK or both
504  * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field
505  * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us
506  * @he_support: does this BSS support HE
507  * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
508  *	mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
509  * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
510  *	mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
511  * @assoc: association status
512  * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
513  *	or not
514  * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
515  * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
516  * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
517  * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
518  * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
519  * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
520  *	valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
521  *	with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
522  * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
523  *	as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
524  *	HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
525  *	only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
526  *	association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
527  *	%BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
528  * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
529  *	the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
530  *	(see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
531  * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
532  *	is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
533  *	IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
534  *	by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
535  *	guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
536  * @beacon_int: beacon interval
537  * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
538  * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
539  *	index into the rate table configured by the driver in
540  *	the current band.
541  * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
542  * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
543  * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
544  * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
545  * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
546  *	configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
547  * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
548  * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
549  *	This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
550  *	Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
551  *	be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
552  * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
553  *	implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
554  *	cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
555  *	relation to the newly configured threshold.
556  * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value
557  *	implies disabled.  This is an alternative mechanism to the single
558  *	threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it.
559  * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold.
560  * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
561  * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
562  *	may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
563  *	The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
564  *	to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
565  * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
566  *	may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
567  *	array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
568  * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
569  * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
570  *	hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
571  *	your driver/device needs to do.
572  * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
573  *	offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
574  * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
575  * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
576  * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
577  * @txpower: TX power in dBm
578  * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
579  *	Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
580  *	TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
581  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
582  *	userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
583  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
584  * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
585  * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
586  *	to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
587  *	if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
588  * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from
589  *	transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated.
590  *	In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include
591  *	a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element.
592  * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN
593  *	protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the
594  *	station.
595  * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM
596  *	responder functionality.
597  * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder.
598  * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile
599  * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP
600  * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set
601  * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set
602  * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of
603  *	nontransmitted BSSIDs
604  * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received
605  *	in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set.
606  */
607 struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
608 	const u8 *bssid;
609 	u8 bss_color;
610 	u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext;
611 	bool multi_sta_back_32bit;
612 	bool uora_exists;
613 	bool ack_enabled;
614 	u8 uora_ocw_range;
615 	u16 frame_time_rts_th;
616 	bool he_support;
617 	bool twt_requester;
618 	bool twt_responder;
619 	/* association related data */
620 	bool assoc, ibss_joined;
621 	bool ibss_creator;
622 	u16 aid;
623 	/* erp related data */
624 	bool use_cts_prot;
625 	bool use_short_preamble;
626 	bool use_short_slot;
627 	bool enable_beacon;
628 	u8 dtim_period;
629 	u16 beacon_int;
630 	u16 assoc_capability;
631 	u64 sync_tsf;
632 	u32 sync_device_ts;
633 	u8 sync_dtim_count;
634 	u32 basic_rates;
635 	struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
636 	int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
637 	u16 ht_operation_mode;
638 	s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
639 	u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
640 	s32 cqm_rssi_low;
641 	s32 cqm_rssi_high;
642 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
643 	struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
644 	__be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
645 	int arp_addr_cnt;
646 	bool qos;
647 	bool idle;
648 	bool ps;
649 	u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
650 	size_t ssid_len;
651 	bool hidden_ssid;
652 	int txpower;
653 	enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
654 	struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
655 	bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
656 	u16 max_idle_period;
657 	bool protected_keep_alive;
658 	bool ftm_responder;
659 	struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params;
660 	/* Multiple BSSID data */
661 	bool nontransmitted;
662 	u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN];
663 	u8 bssid_index;
664 	u8 bssid_indicator;
665 	bool ema_ap;
666 	u8 profile_periodicity;
667 };
668 
669 /**
670  * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
671  *
672  * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
673  *
674  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
675  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
676  *	number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
677  *	number and increasing the sequence number only when the
678  *	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
679  *	assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
680  *	for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
681  *	that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
682  *	If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
683  *	assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
684  *	802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
685  *	beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
686  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
687  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
688  *	station
689  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
690  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
691  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
692  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
693  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
694  *	because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
695  *	avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
696  *	firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
697  *	went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
698  *	the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
699  *	that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
700  *	since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
701  *	hardware queue.
702  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
703  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
704  * 	is for the whole aggregation.
705  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
706  * 	so consider using block ack request (BAR).
707  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
708  *	set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
709  *	be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
710  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
711  *	that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
712  *	off-channel operation.
713  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
714  *	used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
715  *	it can be sent out.
716  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
717  *	used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
718  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
719  *	used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
720  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
721  *	frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
722  *	be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
723  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
724  *	transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
725  *	by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
726  *	queue gets full.
727  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
728  *	after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
729  *	be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
730  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
731  *	code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
732  *	should kick the MLME state machine.
733  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
734  *	MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
735  *	status to user space)
736  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
737  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
738  *	frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
739  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
740  *	the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
741  *	in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
742  *	handled properly by the device.
743  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
744  *	testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
745  *	TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
746  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
747  *	This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
748  *	frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
749  * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
750  *	when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
751  *	an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
752  *	the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
753  *	PS-Poll responses.
754  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
755  *	This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
756  *	the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
757  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
758  *	would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
759  *	monitor injection).
760  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
761  *	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
762  *	any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
763  *	This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
764  *	behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
765  *
766  * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
767  *	 forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
768  */
769 enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
770 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS		= BIT(0),
771 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ		= BIT(1),
772 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK			= BIT(2),
773 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT		= BIT(3),
774 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT		= BIT(4),
775 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM	= BIT(5),
776 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU			= BIT(6),
777 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED		= BIT(7),
778 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED		= BIT(8),
779 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK			= BIT(9),
780 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU			= BIT(10),
781 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK		= BIT(11),
782 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE	= BIT(12),
783 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK	= BIT(13),
784 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING	= BIT(14),
785 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED		= BIT(15),
786 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT		= BIT(16),
787 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER		= BIT(17),
788 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES		= BIT(18),
789 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION	= BIT(19),
790 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX		= BIT(20),
791 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX	= BIT(21),
792 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC			= BIT(22),
793 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC			= BIT(23) | BIT(24),
794 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN		= BIT(25),
795 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE	= BIT(26),
796 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE		= BIT(27),
797 	IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP		= BIT(28),
798 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE		= BIT(29),
799 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG		= BIT(30),
800 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED	= BIT(31),
801 };
802 
803 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT		23
804 
805 /**
806  * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
807  *
808  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
809  *	protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
810  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
811  *	frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
812  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
813  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
814  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
815  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup
816  *
817  * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
818  */
819 enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
820 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO	= BIT(0),
821 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE		= BIT(1),
822 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT		= BIT(2),
823 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU			= BIT(3),
824 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT		= BIT(4),
825 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP	= BIT(5),
826 };
827 
828 /*
829  * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
830  * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
831  */
832 #define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK |		      \
833 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT |    \
834 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU |	      \
835 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED |	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK |		      \
836 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK |	      \
837 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER |    \
838 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC |		      \
839 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
840 
841 /**
842  * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
843  *	Rate Control algorithm.
844  *
845  * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
846  * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
847  *
848  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
849  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
850  *	This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
851  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
852  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
853  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
854  *	into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
855  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
856  *	Greenfield mode.
857  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
858  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
859  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
860  *	(80+80 isn't supported yet)
861  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
862  *	adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
863  *	NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
864  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
865  */
866 enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
867 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS		= BIT(0),
868 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT		= BIT(1),
869 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE	= BIT(2),
870 
871 	/* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
872 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS			= BIT(3),
873 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD		= BIT(4),
874 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(5),
875 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA		= BIT(6),
876 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI		= BIT(7),
877 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS			= BIT(8),
878 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(9),
879 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(10),
880 };
881 
882 
883 /* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
884 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
885 
886 /* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
887 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
888 
889 /* maximum number of rate stages */
890 #define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES	4
891 
892 /* maximum number of rate table entries */
893 #define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE	4
894 
895 /**
896  * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
897  *
898  * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
899  * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
900  * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
901  *
902  * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
903  * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
904  *
905  * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
906  * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
907  *
908  * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
909  * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
910  * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
911  * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
912  * information::
913  *
914  *    { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
915  *
916  * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
917  * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
918  * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
919  * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
920  * information should then contain::
921  *
922  *   { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
923  *
924  * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
925  * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
926  */
927 struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
928 	s8 idx;
929 	u16 count:5,
930 	    flags:11;
931 } __packed;
932 
933 #define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY		31
934 
935 static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
936 					  u8 mcs, u8 nss)
937 {
938 	WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
939 	WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
940 	rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
941 }
942 
943 static inline u8
944 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
945 {
946 	return rate->idx & 0xF;
947 }
948 
949 static inline u8
950 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
951 {
952 	return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
953 }
954 
955 /**
956  * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
957  *
958  * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
959  *  (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
960  *  (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
961  *  (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
962  *
963  * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
964  * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
965  * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
966  * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
967  * @control: union part for control data
968  * @control.rates: TX rates array to try
969  * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS
970  * @control.use_rts: use RTS
971  * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS
972  * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only)
973  * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table
974  * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients
975  * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL)
976  * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL)
977  * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags
978  * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs)
979  * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space
980  * @pad: padding
981  * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates
982  * @status: union part for status data
983  * @status.rates: attempted rates
984  * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal
985  * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length
986  * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length
987  * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy)
988  * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission
989  * @status.is_valid_ack_signal: ACK signal is valid
990  * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area
991  * @ack: union part for pure ACK data
992  * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK
993  * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
994  * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
995  * 	relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
996  * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
997  * 	relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
998  * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
999  */
1000 struct ieee80211_tx_info {
1001 	/* common information */
1002 	u32 flags;
1003 	u8 band;
1004 
1005 	u8 hw_queue;
1006 
1007 	u16 ack_frame_id;
1008 
1009 	union {
1010 		struct {
1011 			union {
1012 				/* rate control */
1013 				struct {
1014 					struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
1015 						IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1016 					s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
1017 					u8 use_rts:1;
1018 					u8 use_cts_prot:1;
1019 					u8 short_preamble:1;
1020 					u8 skip_table:1;
1021 					/* 2 bytes free */
1022 				};
1023 				/* only needed before rate control */
1024 				unsigned long jiffies;
1025 			};
1026 			/* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
1027 			struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1028 			struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
1029 			u32 flags;
1030 			codel_time_t enqueue_time;
1031 		} control;
1032 		struct {
1033 			u64 cookie;
1034 		} ack;
1035 		struct {
1036 			struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1037 			s32 ack_signal;
1038 			u8 ampdu_ack_len;
1039 			u8 ampdu_len;
1040 			u8 antenna;
1041 			u16 tx_time;
1042 			bool is_valid_ack_signal;
1043 			void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
1044 		} status;
1045 		struct {
1046 			struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
1047 				IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1048 			u8 pad[4];
1049 
1050 			void *rate_driver_data[
1051 				IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1052 		};
1053 		void *driver_data[
1054 			IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1055 	};
1056 };
1057 
1058 /**
1059  * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx staus info for rate control
1060  *
1061  * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for
1062  * @info: Basic tx status information
1063  * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver)
1064  */
1065 struct ieee80211_tx_status {
1066 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1067 	struct ieee80211_tx_info *info;
1068 	struct sk_buff *skb;
1069 };
1070 
1071 /**
1072  * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
1073  *
1074  * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
1075  * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
1076  * and the ones generated by mac80211.
1077  *
1078  * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
1079  * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
1080  * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
1081  * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
1082  */
1083 struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
1084 	const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1085 	size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1086 	const u8 *common_ies;
1087 	size_t common_ie_len;
1088 };
1089 
1090 
1091 static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1092 {
1093 	return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
1094 }
1095 
1096 static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1097 {
1098 	return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
1099 }
1100 
1101 /**
1102  * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
1103  *
1104  * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
1105  *
1106  * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
1107  * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
1108  * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
1109  * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
1110  *
1111  * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
1112  *	 info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
1113  *	 instead if you need only the less space that allows.
1114  */
1115 static inline void
1116 ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1117 {
1118 	int i;
1119 
1120 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1121 		     offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
1122 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1123 		     offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
1124 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
1125 	/* clear the rate counts */
1126 	for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1127 		info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1128 
1129 	BUILD_BUG_ON(
1130 	    offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
1131 	memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
1132 	       sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
1133 	       offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
1134 }
1135 
1136 
1137 /**
1138  * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1139  *
1140  * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1141  * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1142  *	Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1143  * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
1144  * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1145  *	verification has been done by the hardware.
1146  * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
1147  *	If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1148  *	hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
1149  * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1150  *	flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1151  *	Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1152  *	is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
1153  * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1154  *	de-duplication by itself.
1155  * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1156  *	the frame.
1157  * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1158  *	the frame.
1159  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1160  *	field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1161  *	was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1162  *	merging.
1163  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1164  *	field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1165  *	(including FCS) was received.
1166  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1167  *	field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
1168  * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1169  *	Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
1170  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1171  *	number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1172  *	each A-MPDU
1173  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1174  *	subframes of a single A-MPDU
1175  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1176  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1177  *	on this subframe
1178  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1179  *	is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
1180  * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1181  *	done by the hardware
1182  * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1183  *	processing it in any regular way.
1184  *	This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1185  *	them for sniffing purposes.
1186  * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1187  *	monitor interfaces.
1188  *	This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1189  *	them for sniffing purposes.
1190  * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1191  *	subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1192  *	All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1193  *	if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1194  *	the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1195  *	deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1196  *	subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1197  *	either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1198  *	interleaved with other frames.
1199  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1200  *	radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1201  *	the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
1202  * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1203  *	This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1204  *	the first subframe.
1205  * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
1206  *	be done in the hardware.
1207  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this
1208  *	frame
1209  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known
1210  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present
1211  *	(&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in
1212  *
1213  *	 - DATA3_DATA_MCS
1214  *	 - DATA3_DATA_DCM
1215  *	 - DATA3_CODING
1216  *	 - DATA5_GI
1217  *	 - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC
1218  *	 - DATA6_NSTS
1219  *	 - DATA3_STBC
1220  *
1221  *	from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data)
1222  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present
1223  *	(&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu)
1224  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present
1225  * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with
1226  *	the "0-length PSDU" field included there.  The value for it is
1227  *	in &struct ieee80211_rx_status.  Note that if this value isn't
1228  *	known the frame shouldn't be reported.
1229  */
1230 enum mac80211_rx_flags {
1231 	RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR		= BIT(0),
1232 	RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED		= BIT(1),
1233 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START	= BIT(2),
1234 	RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED		= BIT(3),
1235 	RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED		= BIT(4),
1236 	RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC		= BIT(5),
1237 	RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC 	= BIT(6),
1238 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START		= BIT(7),
1239 	RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL		= BIT(8),
1240 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS		= BIT(9),
1241 	RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED		= BIT(10),
1242 	RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED		= BIT(11),
1243 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN	= BIT(12),
1244 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST		= BIT(13),
1245 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR	= BIT(14),
1246 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN	= BIT(15),
1247 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END		= BIT(16),
1248 	RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR		= BIT(17),
1249 	RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR		= BIT(18),
1250 	RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE		= BIT(19),
1251 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA	= BIT(20),
1252 	RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED		= BIT(21),
1253 	RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN		= BIT(22),
1254 	RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED		= BIT(23),
1255 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT		= BIT(24),
1256 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN	= BIT(25),
1257 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE		= BIT(26),
1258 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU		= BIT(27),
1259 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG		= BIT(28),
1260 	RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU			= BIT(29),
1261 };
1262 
1263 /**
1264  * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags
1265  *
1266  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
1267  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
1268  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission,
1269  *	if the driver fills this value it should add
1270  *	%IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1271  *	to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact.
1272  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
1273  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
1274  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
1275  */
1276 enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags {
1277 	RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE		= BIT(0),
1278 	RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI		= BIT(2),
1279 	RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF		= BIT(3),
1280 	RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK		= BIT(4) | BIT(5),
1281 	RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC		= BIT(6),
1282 	RX_ENC_FLAG_BF			= BIT(7),
1283 };
1284 
1285 #define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT		4
1286 
1287 enum mac80211_rx_encoding {
1288 	RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0,
1289 	RX_ENC_HT,
1290 	RX_ENC_VHT,
1291 	RX_ENC_HE,
1292 };
1293 
1294 /**
1295  * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1296  *
1297  * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1298  * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
1299  * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
1300  *
1301  * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1302  * 	(TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
1303  * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1304  *	needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
1305  * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1306  *	it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
1307  * @band: the active band when this frame was received
1308  * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
1309  *	This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1310  *	for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
1311  * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1312  *	unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1313  *	@IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
1314  * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1315  *	values were filled.
1316  * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1317  *	support dB or unspecified units)
1318  * @antenna: antenna used
1319  * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
1320  *	HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1321  * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only)
1322  * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
1323  * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding
1324  * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw
1325  * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags
1326  * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc
1327  * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi
1328  * @he_dcm: HE DCM value
1329  * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
1330  * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1331  *	each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1332  * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
1333  * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU
1334  */
1335 struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1336 	u64 mactime;
1337 	u64 boottime_ns;
1338 	u32 device_timestamp;
1339 	u32 ampdu_reference;
1340 	u32 flag;
1341 	u16 freq;
1342 	u8 enc_flags;
1343 	u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3;
1344 	u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1;
1345 	u8 rate_idx;
1346 	u8 nss;
1347 	u8 rx_flags;
1348 	u8 band;
1349 	u8 antenna;
1350 	s8 signal;
1351 	u8 chains;
1352 	s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
1353 	u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
1354 	u8 zero_length_psdu_type;
1355 };
1356 
1357 /**
1358  * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1359  * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1360  *	(this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1361  *	 bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1362  * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1363  *	alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1364  *	description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1365  *	Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1366  * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1367  * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1368  * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1369  *	then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1370  *	@data field.
1371  * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1372  *	the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1373  *	length
1374  * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1375  *
1376  * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1377  * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1378  * data.
1379  */
1380 struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1381 	u32 present;
1382 	u8 align;
1383 	u8 oui[3];
1384 	u8 subns;
1385 	u8 pad;
1386 	u16 len;
1387 	u8 data[];
1388 } __packed;
1389 
1390 /**
1391  * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1392  *
1393  * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1394  *
1395  * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1396  *	to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1397  *	or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
1398  * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1399  *	This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1400  *	meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1401  *	transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1402  *	Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1403  *	driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1404  *	for more.
1405  * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1406  *	the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1407  *	may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1408  *	be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1409  *	it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
1410  * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1411  *	operating channel.
1412  */
1413 enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
1414 	IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR		= (1<<0),
1415 	IEEE80211_CONF_PS		= (1<<1),
1416 	IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE		= (1<<2),
1417 	IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL	= (1<<3),
1418 };
1419 
1420 
1421 /**
1422  * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1423  *
1424  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
1425  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
1426  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
1427  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
1428  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
1429  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
1430  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
1431  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
1432  *	Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1433  *	otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1434  */
1435 enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
1436 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS		= BIT(1),
1437 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL	= BIT(2),
1438 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR		= BIT(3),
1439 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS		= BIT(4),
1440 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER		= BIT(5),
1441 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL		= BIT(6),
1442 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS	= BIT(7),
1443 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE		= BIT(8),
1444 };
1445 
1446 /**
1447  * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1448  *
1449  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1450  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1451  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1452  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1453  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
1454  */
1455 enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1456 	IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1457 	IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1458 	IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1459 	IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1460 
1461 	/* keep last */
1462 	IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1463 };
1464 
1465 /**
1466  * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1467  *
1468  * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1469  *
1470  * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1471  *
1472  * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
1473  * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1474  *	in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1475  *	has been received and the DTIM period is known.
1476  * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1477  *	powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1478  *	the CONF_PS flag is set.
1479  *
1480  * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1481  *	value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
1482  *
1483  * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
1484  * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
1485  *
1486  * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
1487  *	(a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1488  *	but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
1489  * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
1490  *	frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1491  *	number of transmissions not the number of retries
1492  *
1493  * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1494  *	%IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
1495  *	configured for an HT channel.
1496  *	Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1497  *	otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1498  */
1499 struct ieee80211_conf {
1500 	u32 flags;
1501 	int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
1502 
1503 	u16 listen_interval;
1504 	u8 ps_dtim_period;
1505 
1506 	u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1507 
1508 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1509 	bool radar_enabled;
1510 	enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1511 };
1512 
1513 /**
1514  * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1515  *
1516  * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1517  * operation.
1518  *
1519  * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1520  *	Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1521  *	announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1522  *	the driver passed into mac80211.
1523  * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1524  *	rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
1525  * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1526  *	scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
1527  * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
1528  * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1529  * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in
1530   *	current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new
1531   *	channel, expressed in TU.
1532  */
1533 struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1534 	u64 timestamp;
1535 	u32 device_timestamp;
1536 	bool block_tx;
1537 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1538 	u8 count;
1539 	u32 delay;
1540 };
1541 
1542 /**
1543  * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1544  *
1545  * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1546  *	on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
1547  * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1548  *	monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1549  *	connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1550  *	provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
1551  * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1552  *	interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1553  *	but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1554  *	only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
1555  * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1556  *	and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1557  *	this is not pure P2P vif.
1558  */
1559 enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1560 	IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER		= BIT(0),
1561 	IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI		= BIT(1),
1562 	IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD		= BIT(2),
1563 	IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE		= BIT(3),
1564 };
1565 
1566 /**
1567  * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1568  *
1569  * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1570  * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1571  *
1572  * @type: type of this virtual interface
1573  * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1574  *	or the BSS we're associated to
1575  * @addr: address of this interface
1576  * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1577  *	interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
1578  * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1579  *	write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1580  *	for read access.
1581  * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
1582  * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1583  *	these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1584  *	or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1585  *	at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
1586  * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1587  * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
1588  * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1589  *	when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1590  *	path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1591  *	be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1592  *	processed after it switches back to %NULL.
1593  * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
1594  *	interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
1595  *	monitor interface (if that is requested.)
1596  * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1597  *	interface.
1598  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1599  *	sizeof(void \*).
1600  * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
1601  * @txqs_stopped: per AC flag to indicate that intermediate TXQs are stopped,
1602  *	protected by fq->lock.
1603  */
1604 struct ieee80211_vif {
1605 	enum nl80211_iftype type;
1606 	struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
1607 	u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
1608 	bool p2p;
1609 	bool csa_active;
1610 	bool mu_mimo_owner;
1611 
1612 	u8 cab_queue;
1613 	u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1614 
1615 	struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1616 
1617 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1618 
1619 	u32 driver_flags;
1620 
1621 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1622 	struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1623 #endif
1624 
1625 	unsigned int probe_req_reg;
1626 
1627 	bool txqs_stopped[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1628 
1629 	/* must be last */
1630 	u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1631 };
1632 
1633 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1634 {
1635 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
1636 	return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
1637 #endif
1638 	return false;
1639 }
1640 
1641 /**
1642  * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1643  * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1644  *
1645  * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1646  * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1647  *
1648  * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1649  * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1650  * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1651  */
1652 struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1653 
1654 /**
1655  * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1656  * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1657  *
1658  * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1659  * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1660  *
1661  * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1662  * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1663  * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1664  */
1665 struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1666 
1667 /**
1668  * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1669  *
1670  * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1671  * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1672  *
1673  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1674  *	driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
1675  *	particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1676  *	will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
1677  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1678  *	the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1679  *	generation in software.
1680  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1681  *	that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
1682  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
1683  *	CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1684  *	(MFP) to be done in software.
1685  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
1686  *	if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
1687  *	itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
1688  *	@IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1689  *	not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1690  *	MIC.
1691  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1692  *	management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1693  *	crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1694  *	properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1695  *	fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1696  *	RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1697  *	%IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
1698  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
1699  *	driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
1700  *	only for managment frames (MFP).
1701  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1702  *	driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1703  *	be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
1704  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for
1705  *	a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with
1706  *	@IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key.
1707  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation.
1708  */
1709 enum ieee80211_key_flags {
1710 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT	= BIT(0),
1711 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV		= BIT(1),
1712 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC	= BIT(2),
1713 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE		= BIT(3),
1714 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX		= BIT(4),
1715 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE		= BIT(5),
1716 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT		= BIT(6),
1717 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM	= BIT(7),
1718 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE	= BIT(8),
1719 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX		= BIT(9),
1720 };
1721 
1722 /**
1723  * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1724  *
1725  * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1726  * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1727  *
1728  * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1729  *	wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
1730  *	encrypted in hardware.
1731  * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
1732  * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1733  *	needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
1734  * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1735  * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1736  * @keylen: key material length
1737  * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1738  * 	data block:
1739  * 	- Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1740  * 	- Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1741  * 	- Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
1742  * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1743  * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
1744  */
1745 struct ieee80211_key_conf {
1746 	atomic64_t tx_pn;
1747 	u32 cipher;
1748 	u8 icv_len;
1749 	u8 iv_len;
1750 	u8 hw_key_idx;
1751 	s8 keyidx;
1752 	u16 flags;
1753 	u8 keylen;
1754 	u8 key[0];
1755 };
1756 
1757 #define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN	16
1758 
1759 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
1760 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
1761 
1762 /**
1763  * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1764  *
1765  * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1766  * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1767  *	reverse order than in packet)
1768  * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1769  *	reverse order than in packet)
1770  * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1771  *	reverse order than in packet)
1772  * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1773  *	reverse order than in packet)
1774  * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
1775  */
1776 struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1777 	union {
1778 		struct {
1779 			u32 iv32;
1780 			u16 iv16;
1781 		} tkip;
1782 		struct {
1783 			u8 pn[6];
1784 		} ccmp;
1785 		struct {
1786 			u8 pn[6];
1787 		} aes_cmac;
1788 		struct {
1789 			u8 pn[6];
1790 		} aes_gmac;
1791 		struct {
1792 			u8 pn[6];
1793 		} gcmp;
1794 		struct {
1795 			u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1796 			u8 seq_len;
1797 		} hw;
1798 	};
1799 };
1800 
1801 /**
1802  * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1803  *
1804  * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1805  * the secure packet crypto handling.
1806  *
1807  * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1808  * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1809  * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1810  * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1811  * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1812  * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1813  * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1814  * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1815  *     key_idx value calculation:
1816  *      (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1817  * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1818  */
1819 struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1820 	u32 cipher;
1821 	u16 iftype;
1822 	u8 hdr_len;
1823 	u8 pn_len;
1824 	u8 pn_off;
1825 	u8 key_idx_off;
1826 	u8 key_idx_mask;
1827 	u8 key_idx_shift;
1828 	u8 mic_len;
1829 };
1830 
1831 /**
1832  * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1833  *
1834  * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1835  * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1836  *
1837  * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1838  * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1839  */
1840 enum set_key_cmd {
1841 	SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
1842 };
1843 
1844 /**
1845  * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1846  *
1847  * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1848  *	this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1849  * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1850  * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1851  * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1852  * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1853  */
1854 enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1855 	/* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1856 	IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1857 	IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1858 	IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1859 	IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1860 	IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1861 };
1862 
1863 /**
1864  * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1865  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1866  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1867  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1868  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1869  *	(including 80+80 MHz)
1870  *
1871  * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1872  *	correctly, the values must be sorted.
1873  */
1874 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1875 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1876 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1877 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1878 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1879 };
1880 
1881 /**
1882  * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1883  *
1884  * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
1885  * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
1886  *	Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1887  */
1888 struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1889 	struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1890 	struct {
1891 		s8 idx;
1892 		u8 count;
1893 		u8 count_cts;
1894 		u8 count_rts;
1895 		u16 flags;
1896 	} rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1897 };
1898 
1899 /**
1900  * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration
1901  *
1902  * Used to configure txpower for station.
1903  *
1904  * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames
1905  *	to the STA.
1906  * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power
1907  *	will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC
1908  *	%type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power.
1909  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for
1910  *	per peer TPC.
1911  */
1912 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr {
1913 	s16 power;
1914 	enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type;
1915 };
1916 
1917 /**
1918  * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1919  *
1920  * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1921  * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1922  * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1923  * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1924  * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
1925  * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
1926  *
1927  * @addr: MAC address
1928  * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
1929  * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
1930  * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1931  * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1932  * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA
1933  * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
1934  *	that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
1935  *	Can be modified by driver.
1936  * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
1937  *	otherwise always false)
1938  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1939  *	sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
1940  * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
1941  *	if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
1942  *	IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
1943  * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
1944  * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
1945  * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1946  *	station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1947  *	notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1948  *	the station moves to associated state.
1949  * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
1950  * @rates: rate control selection table
1951  * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
1952  * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
1953  *	valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
1954  * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
1955  * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
1956  *	A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
1957  *	unlimited.
1958  * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
1959  * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
1960  * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID
1961  * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction); note that
1962  *	the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) is used for non-data frames
1963  */
1964 struct ieee80211_sta {
1965 	u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1966 	u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1967 	u16 aid;
1968 	struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
1969 	struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
1970 	struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap;
1971 	u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
1972 	bool wme;
1973 	u8 uapsd_queues;
1974 	u8 max_sp;
1975 	u8 rx_nss;
1976 	enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
1977 	enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1978 	struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
1979 	bool tdls;
1980 	bool tdls_initiator;
1981 	bool mfp;
1982 	u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
1983 
1984 	/**
1985 	 * @max_amsdu_len:
1986 	 * indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes.
1987 	 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble.
1988 	 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
1989 	 *
1990 	 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
1991 	 *   A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
1992 	 * * If the skb is not part of a BA aggreement, the A-MSDU maximal
1993 	 *   size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
1994 	 *
1995 	 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level
1996 	 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section
1997 	 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
1998 	 */
1999 	u16 max_amsdu_len;
2000 	bool support_p2p_ps;
2001 	u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
2002 	u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
2003 	struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr;
2004 
2005 	struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1];
2006 
2007 	/* must be last */
2008 	u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2009 };
2010 
2011 /**
2012  * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
2013  *
2014  * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
2015  * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
2016  *
2017  * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
2018  * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
2019  */
2020 enum sta_notify_cmd {
2021 	STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
2022 };
2023 
2024 /**
2025  * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
2026  *
2027  * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
2028  * 	it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
2029  */
2030 struct ieee80211_tx_control {
2031 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2032 };
2033 
2034 /**
2035  * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
2036  *
2037  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
2038  * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
2039  * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue),
2040  *	%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled)
2041  * @ac: the AC for this queue
2042  * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
2043  *
2044  * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
2045  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
2046  */
2047 struct ieee80211_txq {
2048 	struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
2049 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2050 	u8 tid;
2051 	u8 ac;
2052 
2053 	/* must be last */
2054 	u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2055 };
2056 
2057 /**
2058  * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
2059  *
2060  * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
2061  * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
2062  * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
2063  * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
2064  * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
2065  *
2066  * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
2067  *	The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
2068  *	controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
2069  *	should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
2070  *	will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
2071  *	algorithm.
2072  *	Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
2073  *	callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
2074  *	the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
2075  *	@use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
2076  *	timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
2077  *	CCK frames.
2078  *
2079  * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
2080  *	Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
2081  *	the FCS at the end.
2082  *
2083  * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
2084  *	Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
2085  *	for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
2086  *	rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
2087  *	to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
2088  *	multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
2089  *	the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
2090  *
2091  * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
2092  *	Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
2093  *	expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
2094  *	If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
2095  *
2096  * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
2097  *	Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
2098  *	one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
2099  *	between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
2100  *
2101  * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
2102  * 	Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
2103  * 	Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
2104  *
2105  * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
2106  *	Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
2107  *
2108  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
2109  *	Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
2110  *
2111  * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
2112  *	Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
2113  *	stack support for dynamic PS.
2114  *
2115  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
2116  *	Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
2117  *
2118  * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
2119  *	Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
2120  *
2121  * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
2122  *	Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
2123  *	the stack.
2124  *
2125  * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
2126  *	The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
2127  *	periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
2128  *
2129  * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
2130  *	This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
2131  *	dtim_period).
2132  *
2133  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
2134  *	per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
2135  *	the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
2136  *	to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
2137  *	possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
2138  *	only in that case.
2139  *
2140  * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
2141  *	autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
2142  *	this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
2143  *	stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
2144  *	Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
2145  *	the PS mode of connected stations.
2146  *
2147  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
2148  *	setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
2149  *	software.
2150  *
2151  * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
2152  *	a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
2153  *	active interfaces.
2154  *
2155  * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
2156  *	be created.  It is expected user-space will create vifs as
2157  *	desired (and thus have them named as desired).
2158  *
2159  * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
2160  *	crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
2161  *	try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
2162  *	the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
2163  *	supported cipher suites.
2164  *
2165  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
2166  *	this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
2167  *	for frames.
2168  *
2169  * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
2170  *	queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
2171  *	for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
2172  *	control for more details.
2173  *
2174  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
2175  *	selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
2176  *
2177  * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
2178  *	P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
2179  *	is supported.
2180  *
2181  * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
2182  *	only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
2183  *
2184  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
2185  *	and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
2186  *	using aggregation for such frames.)
2187  *
2188  * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
2189  *	for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
2190  *	is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
2191  *	CSA frame.
2192  *
2193  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
2194  *	or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
2195  *
2196  * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
2197  *	in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
2198  *
2199  * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
2200  *	than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
2201  *
2202  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2203  *	within A-MPDU.
2204  *
2205  * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2206  *	for sent beacons.
2207  *
2208  * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2209  *	station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2210  *	by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2211  *	from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2212  *
2213  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2214  *	reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2215  *	order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2216  *	timeout.
2217  *
2218  * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2219  *	which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2220  *
2221  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2222  *	A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2223  *	When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2224  *	limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2225  *	max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2226  *
2227  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2228  *	skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2229  *
2230  * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2231  *	by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2232  *	drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2233  *	is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2234  *
2235  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
2236  *	The stack will not do fragmentation.
2237  *	The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
2238  *
2239  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on
2240  *	TDLS links.
2241  *
2242  * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the
2243  *	mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a
2244  *	deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no
2245  *	beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the
2246  *	virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of
2247  *	the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the
2248  *	deauthentication frame might not be transmitted.
2249  *
2250  * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't
2251  *	support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug.
2252  *
2253  * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of
2254  *	course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with.
2255  *
2256  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT
2257  *	extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if
2258  *	the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW
2259  *	but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver.
2260  *	See also the documentation for that flag.
2261  *
2262  * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all
2263  *	MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use
2264  *	TXQs to start with.
2265  *
2266  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU
2267  *	length in tx status information
2268  *
2269  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2270  *
2271  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2272  *	only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set.
2273  *
2274  * @IEEE80211_HW_EXT_KEY_ID_NATIVE: Driver and hardware are supporting Extended
2275  *	Key ID and can handle two unicast keys per station for Rx and Tx.
2276  *
2277  * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card/driver can't handle
2278  *	active Tx A-MPDU sessions with Extended Key IDs during rekey.
2279  *
2280  * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
2281  */
2282 enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
2283 	IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2284 	IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2285 	IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2286 	IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2287 	IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2288 	IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2289 	IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2290 	IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2291 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2292 	IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2293 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2294 	IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2295 	IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2296 	IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2297 	IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2298 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2299 	IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2300 	IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2301 	IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2302 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2303 	IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2304 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2305 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2306 	IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2307 	IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2308 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2309 	IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2310 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2311 	IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
2312 	IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
2313 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
2314 	IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
2315 	IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
2316 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
2317 	IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
2318 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2319 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
2320 	IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
2321 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
2322 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA,
2323 	IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP,
2324 	IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP,
2325 	IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ,
2326 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW,
2327 	IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ,
2328 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN,
2329 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID,
2330 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID,
2331 	IEEE80211_HW_EXT_KEY_ID_NATIVE,
2332 	IEEE80211_HW_NO_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT,
2333 
2334 	/* keep last, obviously */
2335 	NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
2336 };
2337 
2338 /**
2339  * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
2340  *
2341  * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2342  * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2343  *
2344  * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2345  *	802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2346  *	members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
2347  *	and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2348  *	bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
2349  *
2350  * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2351  *
2352  * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2353  *	along with this structure.
2354  *
2355  * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2356  *
2357  * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2358  *	for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2359  *
2360  * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2361  *	Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
2362  *
2363  * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
2364  *	only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
2365  *
2366  * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
2367  *	that HW supports
2368  *
2369  * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
2370  *	data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2371  *	queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2372  *
2373  * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2374  *	If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2375  *	set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
2376  *
2377  * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2378  *	within &struct ieee80211_vif.
2379  * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2380  *	within &struct ieee80211_sta.
2381  * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2382  *	within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
2383  * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2384  *	within @struct ieee80211_txq.
2385  *
2386  * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2387  *	can handle.
2388  * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2389  *	the hw can report back.
2390  * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
2391  *
2392  * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2393  *	sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2394  *	aggregation.
2395  *	This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2396  *	number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2397  *	it shouldn't be set.
2398  *
2399  * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
2400  *	aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll
2401  *	advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if
2402  *	the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N
2403  *	with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012).
2404  *	For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used.
2405  *
2406  * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2407  *	of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2408  *
2409  * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2410  *	(if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
2411  *
2412  * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2413  *	reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
2414  *	include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
2415  *	adding _BW is supported today.
2416  *
2417  * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2418  *	the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
2419  *	Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
2420  *
2421  * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags
2422  *
2423  * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2424  *	@units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp
2425  *	field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2426  *	device_timestamp.
2427  * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a
2428  *	IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2429  *	IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value.
2430  * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the
2431  *	radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set.
2432  *
2433  * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
2434  *	from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2435  *	other features will be rejected during HW registration.
2436  *
2437  * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2438  *	for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2439  *	enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2440  *	Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2441  *	that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2442  *	neither enabled.
2443  *
2444  * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2445  *	deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2446  *	Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
2447  *
2448  * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2449  * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2450  *	supported by HW.
2451  * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2452  *	device.
2453  *
2454  * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from
2455  *	them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed,
2456  *	unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers.
2457  *
2458  * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while
2459  *	refilling deficit of each TXQ.
2460  */
2461 struct ieee80211_hw {
2462 	struct ieee80211_conf conf;
2463 	struct wiphy *wiphy;
2464 	const char *rate_control_algorithm;
2465 	void *priv;
2466 	unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
2467 	unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
2468 	unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
2469 	int vif_data_size;
2470 	int sta_data_size;
2471 	int chanctx_data_size;
2472 	int txq_data_size;
2473 	u16 queues;
2474 	u16 max_listen_interval;
2475 	s8 max_signal;
2476 	u8 max_rates;
2477 	u8 max_report_rates;
2478 	u8 max_rate_tries;
2479 	u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2480 	u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
2481 	u8 max_tx_fragments;
2482 	u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
2483 	u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
2484 	u16 radiotap_vht_details;
2485 	struct {
2486 		int units_pos;
2487 		s16 accuracy;
2488 	} radiotap_timestamp;
2489 	netdev_features_t netdev_features;
2490 	u8 uapsd_queues;
2491 	u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
2492 	u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2493 	const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
2494 	u8 max_nan_de_entries;
2495 	u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift;
2496 	u8 weight_multiplier;
2497 };
2498 
2499 static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2500 				       enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2501 {
2502 	return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2503 }
2504 #define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg)	_ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2505 
2506 static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2507 				     enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2508 {
2509 	return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2510 }
2511 #define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg)	_ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2512 
2513 /**
2514  * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2515  *
2516  * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2517  * @req: cfg80211 request.
2518  */
2519 struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2520 	struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2521 
2522 	/* Keep last */
2523 	struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2524 };
2525 
2526 /**
2527  * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2528  *
2529  * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2530  * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2531  * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2532  * @status: channel-switch response status
2533  * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2534  * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2535  * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2536  * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2537  * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2538  */
2539 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2540 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2541 	struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2542 	u8 action_code;
2543 	u32 status;
2544 	u32 timestamp;
2545 	u16 switch_time;
2546 	u16 switch_timeout;
2547 	struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2548 	u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2549 };
2550 
2551 /**
2552  * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2553  *
2554  * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2555  *
2556  * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2557  * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2558  * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2559  * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2560  * is already used internally by mac80211.
2561  *
2562  * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
2563  */
2564 struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2565 
2566 /**
2567  * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2568  *
2569  * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2570  * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2571  */
2572 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2573 {
2574 	set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2575 }
2576 
2577 /**
2578  * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
2579  *
2580  * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2581  * @addr: the address to set
2582  */
2583 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
2584 {
2585 	memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2586 }
2587 
2588 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2589 ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2590 		      const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2591 {
2592 	if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
2593 		return NULL;
2594 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
2595 }
2596 
2597 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2598 ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2599 			   const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2600 {
2601 	if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
2602 		return NULL;
2603 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
2604 }
2605 
2606 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2607 ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2608 			     const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
2609 {
2610 	if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
2611 		return NULL;
2612 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
2613 }
2614 
2615 /**
2616  * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2617  * @hw: the hardware
2618  * @skb: the skb
2619  *
2620  * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
2621  * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2622  */
2623 void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2624 
2625 /**
2626  * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
2627  *
2628  * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2629  * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2630  *
2631  * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2632  * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
2633  * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2634  * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2635  * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
2636  * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2637  * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2638  *
2639  * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2640  * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2641  * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2642  *
2643  * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2644  * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2645  * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2646  * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2647  *
2648  * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2649  * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2650  * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2651  * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2652  *
2653  * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2654  *
2655  * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2656  * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2657  * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2658  * based on the receive flags.
2659  *
2660  * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2661  * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2662  * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2663  * keys.
2664  *
2665  * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2666  * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2667  * handler.
2668  * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
2669  * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
2670  * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2671  * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
2672  * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
2673  * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
2674  *
2675  * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2676  * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2677  * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
2678  *
2679  * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag
2680  * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to to following
2681  * requirements:
2682  * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to
2683       mac80211 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been
2684       completed when also setting @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV for any key,
2685    2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued
2686       at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits),
2687    3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command
2688       encrypted with the new key and
2689    4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted.
2690    Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver.
2691  */
2692 
2693 /**
2694  * DOC: Powersave support
2695  *
2696  * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2697  *
2698  * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2699  * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2700  * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2701  * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2702  * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2703  * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2704  * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2705  * it finds traffic directed to it.
2706  *
2707  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2708  * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2709  * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
2710  * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2711  * back to sleep at appropriate times.
2712  *
2713  * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2714  * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2715  * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
2716  *
2717  * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2718  * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2719  * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2720  * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
2721  * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2722  * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
2723  * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
2724  *
2725  * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2726  * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2727  * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2728  * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2729  * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2730  * periods.
2731  *
2732  * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
2733  * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2734  * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2735  * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2736  * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2737  * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2738  * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2739  * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2740  * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2741  * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2742  *
2743  * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
2744  * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
2745  * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
2746  * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2747  * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2748  * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2749  *
2750  * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2751  * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
2752  */
2753 
2754 /**
2755  * DOC: Beacon filter support
2756  *
2757  * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
2758  * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
2759  * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2760  * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2761  * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2762  * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2763  * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2764  *
2765  * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2766  * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
2767  * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2768  * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2769  * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2770  *
2771  * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2772  * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2773  * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2774  * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2775  *
2776  * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2777  * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2778  * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2779  * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
2780  *
2781  *  - a list of information element IDs
2782  *  - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2783  *
2784  * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2785  * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2786  * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2787  * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2788  * vendor information elements.
2789  *
2790  * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2791  * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2792  *
2793  * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2794  * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2795  * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2796  * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2797  * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2798  * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2799  *
2800  *
2801  * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2802  * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2803  * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2804  * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2805  * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2806  * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2807  * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2808  * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2809  *
2810  * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2811  * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2812  * signal strength threshold checking.
2813  */
2814 
2815 /**
2816  * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2817  *
2818  * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2819  * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2820  * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2821  * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2822  *
2823  * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2824  * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2825  * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2826  * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2827  * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2828  * hardware flags.
2829  *
2830  * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2831  * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2832  * turned off otherwise.
2833  *
2834  * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2835  * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2836  * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2837  * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2838  */
2839 
2840 /**
2841  * DOC: Frame filtering
2842  *
2843  * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2844  * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2845  * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2846  * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2847  * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2848  *
2849  * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2850  * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2851  * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2852  *
2853  * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2854  * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2855  * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2856  * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2857  * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2858  * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2859  * @total_flags with the new flag states.
2860  *
2861  * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2862  * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2863  * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2864  * or dropped.
2865  *
2866  * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2867  * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2868  * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2869  * the flag, but not clear it.
2870  * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2871  * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2872  * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2873  * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2874  * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2875  * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2876  * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2877  * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
2878  */
2879 
2880 /**
2881  * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2882  *
2883  * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2884  * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2885  * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2886  *
2887  * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2888  * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2889  * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2890  * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2891  * the driver code.
2892  *
2893  * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2894  * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2895  * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2896  * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2897  * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2898  * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2899  * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2900  *
2901  * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2902  * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2903  * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2904  * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2905  * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2906  * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2907  * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2908  * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2909  * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2910  * @sta_notify callback.
2911  *
2912  * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2913  * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2914  * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2915  * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2916  * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2917  * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2918  * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
2919  * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
2920  * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2921  * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2922  * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2923  * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2924  * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2925  * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2926  *
2927  * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2928  * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2929  *
2930  * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2931  * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2932  * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2933  * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2934  * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2935  * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2936  * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2937  * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2938  * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2939  * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2940  * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2941  *
2942  * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2943  * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2944  * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2945  * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2946  * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2947  * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2948  * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2949  * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2950  * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2951  * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
2952  * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
2953  * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2954  * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2955  * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2956  *
2957  * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2958  * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2959  * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2960  * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2961  * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
2962  * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
2963  * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2964  *
2965  * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2966  * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2967  * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2968  * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
2969  * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
2970  *
2971  * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
2972  * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
2973  * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
2974  * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
2975  */
2976 
2977 /**
2978  * DOC: HW queue control
2979  *
2980  * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
2981  * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
2982  * was problematic for a few reasons:
2983  * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
2984  * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
2985  * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
2986  *
2987  * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
2988  * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
2989  * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
2990  *
2991  * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
2992  * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
2993  * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
2994  * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
2995  * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
2996  * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
2997  * the hardware queue.
2998  * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
2999  * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
3000  *
3001  * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
3002  * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
3003  * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
3004  * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
3005  * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
3006  *
3007  * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
3008  * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
3009  * after-DTIM queue for AP:   8
3010  * off-channel queue:         9
3011  *
3012  * It would then set up the hardware like this:
3013  *   hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
3014  *
3015  * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
3016  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
3017  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
3018  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
3019  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
3020  *   vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3021  * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
3022  *
3023  * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
3024  * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
3025  *
3026  * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3027  * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
3028  * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
3029  * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
3030  */
3031 
3032 /**
3033  * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
3034  *
3035  * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
3036  * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
3037  * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
3038  * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
3039  *
3040  * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
3041  *	by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
3042  *	multicast address.
3043  *
3044  * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
3045  *	%RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
3046  *
3047  * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
3048  *	the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
3049  *
3050  * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
3051  *	to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
3052  *	by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
3053  *	mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
3054  *	honour this flag if possible.
3055  *
3056  * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
3057  *	station
3058  *
3059  * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
3060  *
3061  * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
3062  *
3063  * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
3064  */
3065 enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
3066 	FIF_ALLMULTI		= 1<<1,
3067 	FIF_FCSFAIL		= 1<<2,
3068 	FIF_PLCPFAIL		= 1<<3,
3069 	FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC	= 1<<4,
3070 	FIF_CONTROL		= 1<<5,
3071 	FIF_OTHER_BSS		= 1<<6,
3072 	FIF_PSPOLL		= 1<<7,
3073 	FIF_PROBE_REQ		= 1<<8,
3074 };
3075 
3076 /**
3077  * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
3078  *
3079  * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
3080  * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
3081  *
3082  * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
3083  * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
3084  * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
3085  * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
3086  *
3087  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
3088  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
3089  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
3090  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
3091  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
3092  *	queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
3093  *	driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
3094  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
3095  *	called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
3096  *	ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
3097  *	session is gone and removes the station.
3098  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
3099  *	but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
3100  *	now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
3101  *	should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
3102  */
3103 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
3104 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
3105 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
3106 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
3107 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
3108 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
3109 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
3110 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
3111 };
3112 
3113 /**
3114  * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
3115  *
3116  * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3117  * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
3118  * @tid: tid of the BA session
3119  * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
3120  *	action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
3121  *	actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
3122  * @buf_size: reorder buffer size  (number of subframes). Valid only when the
3123  *	action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
3124  *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3125  * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
3126  *	valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3127  * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
3128  *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
3129  */
3130 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
3131 	enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
3132 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
3133 	u16 tid;
3134 	u16 ssn;
3135 	u16 buf_size;
3136 	bool amsdu;
3137 	u16 timeout;
3138 };
3139 
3140 /**
3141  * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
3142  * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
3143  * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
3144  *	frame received on trigger-enabled AC
3145  */
3146 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
3147 	IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
3148 	IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
3149 };
3150 
3151 /**
3152  * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
3153  *
3154  * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
3155  *	to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
3156  *	information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
3157  *	flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
3158  * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
3159  * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
3160  *	changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
3161  *	the peer.
3162  * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
3163  *	by the peer
3164  */
3165 enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
3166 	IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED		= BIT(0),
3167 	IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED	= BIT(1),
3168 	IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED	= BIT(2),
3169 	IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED	= BIT(3),
3170 };
3171 
3172 /**
3173  * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
3174  *
3175  * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
3176  * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
3177  * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
3178  * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
3179  * operations compared to other operations/flows.
3180  *
3181  * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
3182  * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
3183  *	for sending managment frames offchannel.
3184  */
3185 enum ieee80211_roc_type {
3186 	IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
3187 	IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
3188 };
3189 
3190 /**
3191  * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
3192  *
3193  * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
3194  * reconfiguration type was completed.
3195  *
3196  * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
3197  *	(also due to resume() callback returning 1)
3198  * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
3199  *	of wowlan configuration)
3200  */
3201 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
3202 	IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
3203 	IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
3204 };
3205 
3206 /**
3207  * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
3208  *
3209  * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
3210  * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
3211  * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
3212  *
3213  * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
3214  *	skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
3215  *	The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
3216  *	configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
3217  *	preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
3218  *	Must be atomic.
3219  *
3220  * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
3221  *	is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
3222  *	frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
3223  *	Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
3224  *	or zero.
3225  *	When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
3226  *	to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
3227  *	is added.
3228  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3229  *
3230  * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
3231  *	is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
3232  *	it must turn off frame reception.)
3233  *	May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
3234  *	an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
3235  *	you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
3236  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3237  *
3238  * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
3239  *	stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
3240  *	ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
3241  *	configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
3242  *	reconfigured at resume time.
3243  *	The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
3244  *	wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
3245  *	supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
3246  *	must return 1 from this function.
3247  *
3248  * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
3249  *	now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
3250  *	functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
3251  *	to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
3252  *	will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
3253  *
3254  * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
3255  *	modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
3256  *	supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
3257  *	in suspend().
3258  *
3259  * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
3260  *	enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
3261  *	and @stop must be implemented.
3262  *	The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
3263  *	the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
3264  *	interface is given in the conf parameter.
3265  *	The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
3266  *	negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
3267  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3268  *
3269  * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
3270  *	is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
3271  *	switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
3272  *	Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
3273  *	found by the interface iteration callbacks.
3274  *
3275  * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
3276  *	The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
3277  *	and no monitor interfaces are present.
3278  *	When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
3279  *	must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
3280  *	the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
3281  *	MAC address of the device going away.
3282  *	Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
3283  *
3284  * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
3285  *	function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
3286  *	This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
3287  *	if it does. The callback can sleep.
3288  *
3289  * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3290  *	parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3291  *	level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3292  *	This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3293  *	for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
3294  *	of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3295  *	can sleep.
3296  *
3297  * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3298  *	This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3299  *	to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3300  *
3301  * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3302  *	See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
3303  *	This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
3304  *
3305  * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3306  *	This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3307  *	should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3308  *	of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3309  *	which flags are changed.
3310  *	This callback can sleep.
3311  *
3312  * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
3313  * 	must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
3314  *
3315  * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3316  *	This callback is only called between add_interface and
3317  *	remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
3318  *	is enabled.
3319  *	Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
3320  *	The callback can sleep.
3321  *
3322  * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3323  * 	This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3324  * 	which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
3325  *	The callback must be atomic.
3326  *
3327  * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3328  *	host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3329  *	necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3330  *	After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3331  *	userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3332  *
3333  * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3334  *	WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3335  *	offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3336  *
3337  * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
3338  *	the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
3339  *	configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3340  *	registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
3341  *	that power save is disabled.
3342  *	The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3343  *	entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3344  *	at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3345  *	(extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3346  *	When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3347  *	note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3348  *	any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
3349  *	This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1,
3350  *	this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a
3351  *	software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this
3352  *	capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't
3353  *	advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is.
3354  *	The callback can sleep.
3355  *
3356  * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3357  *	The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3358  *	but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3359  *	ieee80211_scan_completed().
3360  *	This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3361  *	scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3362  *	The callback can sleep.
3363  *
3364  * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3365  *	specific intervals.  The driver must call the
3366  *	ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3367  *	This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3368  *
3369  * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
3370  *	In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
3371  *
3372  * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3373  *	is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
3374  *	The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3375  *	the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3376  *	can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
3377  *
3378  * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3379  *	software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3380  *	this notification.
3381  *	The callback can sleep.
3382  *
3383  * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3384  * 	Returns zero if statistics are available.
3385  *	The callback can sleep.
3386  *
3387  * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3388  *	IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3389  *	IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
3390  *	The callback must be atomic.
3391  *
3392  * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
3393  *	if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
3394  *	stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
3395  *	should be set as well.
3396  *	The callback can sleep.
3397  *
3398  * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
3399  *	The callback can sleep.
3400  *
3401  * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3402  *	AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3403  *
3404  * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
3405  *	station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3406  *	returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3407  *	no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3408  *	the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3409  *	This callback can sleep.
3410  *
3411  * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3412  *	when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
3413  *	should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3414  *	callback can sleep.
3415  *
3416  * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
3417  *	associated station, AP,  IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3418  *	in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3419  *	%IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
3420  *
3421  * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3422  *	station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3423  *	This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3424  *	It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
3425  *	up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3426  *	isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3427  *	period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3428  *	See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3429  *	The callback can sleep.
3430  *
3431  * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3432  *	synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3433  *	pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3434  *	the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3435  *	in @sta_state.
3436  *	The callback can sleep.
3437  *
3438  * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3439  *	used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3440  *	from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3441  *	in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3442  *	uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3443  *	otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3444  *	Must be atomic.
3445  * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3446  *	is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3447  *	the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
3448  *
3449  * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3450  *	filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3451  *	let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3452  *	the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3453  *	all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3454  *	Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3455  *	The callback can sleep.
3456  *
3457  * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
3458  *	bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
3459  *	Returns a negative error code on failure.
3460  *	The callback can sleep.
3461  *
3462  * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
3463  *	this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
3464  *	required function.
3465  *	The callback can sleep.
3466  *
3467  * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
3468  *	Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
3469  *	required function.
3470  *	The callback can sleep.
3471  *
3472  * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3473  *	firmware/hardware.  Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3474  *	calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3475  *	as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3476  *	The callback can sleep.
3477  *
3478  * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3479  *	with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3480  *	function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3481  *	TSF synchronization.
3482  *	The callback can sleep.
3483  *
3484  * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3485  *	This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3486  *	used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
3487  *	Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
3488  *	The callback can sleep.
3489  *
3490  * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3491  *
3492  * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3493  *	need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3494  *	and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
3495  *	The callback can sleep.
3496  *
3497  * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3498  *	in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
3499  *	accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3500  *	estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3501  *	coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
3502  *
3503  * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3504  *	be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
3505  * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
3506  *
3507  * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
3508  *	that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3509  *	of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3510  *	use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3511  *	If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
3512  *	Note that vif can be NULL.
3513  *	The callback can sleep.
3514  *
3515  * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3516  *	switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3517  *	callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3518  *	completion of the channel switch.
3519  *
3520  * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3521  *	Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3522  *	reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3523  *	(also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3524  *
3525  * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
3526  *
3527  * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3528  *	call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3529  *	that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3530  *	offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3531  *	normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3532  *	duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
3533  *	ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
3534  *	Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3535  *	must be accepted in this case.
3536  *	This callback may sleep.
3537  * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3538  *	aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
3539  *
3540  * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3541  *
3542  * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
3543  *
3544  * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3545  *	queues before entering power save.
3546  *
3547  * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3548  *	when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3549  *	The callback can sleep.
3550  * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3551  *	&enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
3552  *	The callback must be atomic.
3553  *
3554  * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3555  *	parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3556  *	sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3557  *	to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
3558  *	Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
3559  *	if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3560  *	the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3561  *	the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3562  *	more-data bit must always be set.
3563  *	The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3564  *	from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
3565  *	In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3566  *	@num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3567  *	this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3568  *	on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3569  *	period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3570  *	responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
3571  *	In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3572  *	bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3573  *	at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
3574  *	setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3575  *	service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
3576  *	on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
3577  *	ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
3578  *	This callback must be atomic.
3579  * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3580  *	to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3581  *	via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
3582  *	released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
3583  *	and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3584  *	frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3585  *	them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3586  *	on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
3587  *	bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
3588  *	ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
3589  *	The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3590  *	frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3591  *	This callback must be atomic.
3592  *
3593  * @get_et_sset_count:  Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3594  *
3595  * @get_et_stats:  Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3596  *
3597  * @get_et_strings:  Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3598  *	and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3599  *
3600  * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3601  *	before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3602  *	bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3603  *	yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3604  *	transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3605  *	powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3606  *	management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3607  *	driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3608  *	and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3609  *	For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211
3610  *	would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication
3611  *	frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO.
3612  *	The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3613  *	mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3614  *      If duration is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the driver the
3615  *      duration for which the operation is requested.
3616  *	The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
3617  *
3618  * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3619  *	a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3620  *	channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3621  *	setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3622  *	mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3623  *	discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3624  *	2 * (DTIM period).
3625  *	The callback is optional and can sleep.
3626  *
3627  * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
3628  *	This callback may sleep.
3629  * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
3630  *	This callback may sleep.
3631  * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3632  *	may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3633  *	channel context with different settings
3634  *	This callback may sleep.
3635  * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3636  *	to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
3637  *	This callback may sleep.
3638  * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3639  *	unbound from vif.
3640  *	This callback may sleep.
3641  * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3642  *	another, as specified in the list of
3643  *	@ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3644  *	to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
3645  *	This callback may sleep.
3646  *
3647  * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3648  *	information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3649  *	context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3650  *	software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3651  *	just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3652  *	disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3653  * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
3654  *
3655  * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3656  *	during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3657  *	This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3658  *	indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3659  *	This callback may sleep.
3660  *
3661  * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3662  *	Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3663  *	This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
3664  *
3665  * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3666  *	Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3667  *	function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
3668  *	decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
3669  *	ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3670  *	get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
3671  *	1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
3672  *	transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
3673  *	If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3674  *	since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
3675  * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3676  *	before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
3677  *	gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
3678  *	the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
3679  * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3680  *	after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3681  *	driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3682  * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3683  *	when channel switch procedure was completed, allowing the
3684  *	driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3685  * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called
3686  *	when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with
3687  *	CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count.
3688  * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3689  *	information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3690  *	channel context is bound before this is called.
3691  * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
3692  *
3693  * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3694  *	specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3695  *	if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
3696  *
3697  * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3698  *	and hardware limits.
3699  *
3700  * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3701  *	is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3702  *	and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3703  *	driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3704  *	the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3705  *	The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3706  *	optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3707  * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3708  *	peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
3709  * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3710  *	response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3711  *	parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3712  *	an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3713  *	response template is provided, together with the location of the
3714  *	switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3715  *	the function call.
3716  *
3717  * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
3718  * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
3719  *	synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
3720  *	pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
3721  *	currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
3722  *
3723  * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
3724  * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
3725  * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
3726  *	contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
3727  *	are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
3728  *	The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
3729  *	some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
3730  *	changed parameters.
3731  * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
3732  *	cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
3733  *	this call.
3734  * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
3735  *	ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
3736  *	NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
3737  * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports
3738  *	aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation
3739  *	between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while
3740  *	skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU.
3741  * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available.
3742  *	Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided.
3743  *
3744  * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep)
3745  * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep)
3746  */
3747 struct ieee80211_ops {
3748 	void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3749 		   struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3750 		   struct sk_buff *skb);
3751 	int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3752 	void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3753 #ifdef CONFIG_PM
3754 	int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3755 	int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3756 	void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
3757 #endif
3758 	int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3759 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3760 	int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3761 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3762 				enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
3763 	void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3764 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3765 	int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
3766 	void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3767 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3768 				 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3769 				 u32 changed);
3770 
3771 	int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3772 	void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3773 
3774 	u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3775 				 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
3776 	void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3777 				 unsigned int changed_flags,
3778 				 unsigned int *total_flags,
3779 				 u64 multicast);
3780 	void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3781 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3782 				    unsigned int filter_flags,
3783 				    unsigned int changed_flags);
3784 	int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3785 		       bool set);
3786 	int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
3787 		       struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3788 		       struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
3789 	void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3790 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3791 				struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3792 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3793 				u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
3794 	void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3795 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3796 			       struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
3797 	void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3798 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
3799 	int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3800 		       struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
3801 	void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3802 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3803 	int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3804 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3805 				struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
3806 				struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
3807 	int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3808 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3809 	void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3810 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3811 			      const u8 *mac_addr);
3812 	void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3813 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3814 	int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3815 			 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
3816 	void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3817 			    struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
3818 			    struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3819 	int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3820 	int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3821 	int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3822 		       struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3823 	int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3824 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3825 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3826 	void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3827 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3828 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3829 				struct dentry *dir);
3830 #endif
3831 	void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3832 			enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3833 	int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3834 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3835 			     struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3836 	int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3837 			 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3838 			 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3839 			 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
3840 	void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3841 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3842 				   struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3843 	void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3844 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3845 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3846 			      u32 changed);
3847 	void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3848 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3849 				    struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3850 	void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3851 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3852 			       struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3853 			       struct station_info *sinfo);
3854 	int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3855 		       struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
3856 		       const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
3857 	u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3858 	void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3859 			u64 tsf);
3860 	void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3861 			   s64 offset);
3862 	void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3863 	int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3864 
3865 	/**
3866 	 * @ampdu_action:
3867 	 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action.
3868 	 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
3869 	 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
3870 	 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3871 	 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
3872 	 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
3873 	 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
3874 	 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
3875 	 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
3876 	 *
3877 	 * - ``TX: 1.....7``
3878 	 * - ``RX:  2....7`` (lost frame #1)
3879 	 * - ``TX:        8..1...``
3880 	 *
3881 	 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
3882 	 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
3883 	 *
3884 	 * - ``TX:        1   or``
3885 	 * - ``TX:        18  or``
3886 	 * - ``TX:        81``
3887 	 *
3888 	 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
3889 	 *
3890 	 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
3891 	 * The callback can sleep.
3892 	 */
3893 	int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3894 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3895 			    struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
3896 	int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
3897 		struct survey_info *survey);
3898 	void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3899 	void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
3900 #ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
3901 	int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3902 			    void *data, int len);
3903 	int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3904 			     struct netlink_callback *cb,
3905 			     void *data, int len);
3906 #endif
3907 	void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3908 		      u32 queues, bool drop);
3909 	void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3910 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3911 			       struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
3912 	int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
3913 	int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
3914 
3915 	int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3916 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3917 				 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
3918 				 int duration,
3919 				 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
3920 	int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3921 	int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
3922 	void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3923 			      u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
3924 	bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3925 	int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3926 				const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
3927 	void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3928 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3929 			       const struct ieee80211_event *event);
3930 
3931 	void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3932 				      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3933 				      u16 tids, int num_frames,
3934 				      enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3935 				      bool more_data);
3936 	void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3937 					struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3938 					u16 tids, int num_frames,
3939 					enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3940 					bool more_data);
3941 
3942 	int	(*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3943 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
3944 	void	(*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3945 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3946 				struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
3947 	void	(*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3948 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3949 				  u32 sset, u8 *data);
3950 
3951 	void	(*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3952 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3953 				  u16 duration);
3954 
3955 	void	(*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3956 					     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3957 
3958 	int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3959 			   struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3960 	void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3961 			       struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3962 	void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3963 			       struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
3964 			       u32 changed);
3965 	int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3966 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3967 				  struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3968 	void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3969 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3970 				     struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3971 	int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3972 				  struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
3973 				  int n_vifs,
3974 				  enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
3975 
3976 	void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3977 				  enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
3978 
3979 #if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
3980 	void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3981 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3982 				 struct inet6_dev *idev);
3983 #endif
3984 	void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3985 				      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3986 				      struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
3987 	int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3988 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3989 				  struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
3990 
3991 	int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3992 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3993 	void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3994 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3995 	void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3996 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3997 					 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
3998 
3999 	int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4000 	void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4001 	u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4002 				       struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4003 	int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4004 			   int *dbm);
4005 
4006 	int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4007 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4008 				   struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
4009 				   struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
4010 				   struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
4011 	void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4012 					   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4013 					   struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4014 	void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4015 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4016 					 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
4017 
4018 	void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4019 			      struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
4020 	void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4021 
4022 	int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4023 			 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4024 			 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
4025 	int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4026 			struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4027 	int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4028 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4029 			       struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
4030 	int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4031 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4032 			    const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
4033 	void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4034 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4035 			    u8 instance_id);
4036 	bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4037 				       struct sk_buff *head,
4038 				       struct sk_buff *skb);
4039 	int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4040 				       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4041 				       struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats);
4042 	int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4043 			  struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4044 	void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4045 			   struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4046 };
4047 
4048 /**
4049  * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
4050  *
4051  * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4052  * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4053  * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4054  * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4055  * @priv_data_len.
4056  *
4057  * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4058  * @ops: callbacks for this device
4059  * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
4060  *	NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
4061  *
4062  * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4063  */
4064 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
4065 					   const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
4066 					   const char *requested_name);
4067 
4068 /**
4069  * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
4070  *
4071  * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4072  * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4073  * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4074  * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4075  * @priv_data_len.
4076  *
4077  * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4078  * @ops: callbacks for this device
4079  *
4080  * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4081  */
4082 static inline
4083 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
4084 					const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
4085 {
4086 	return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
4087 }
4088 
4089 /**
4090  * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
4091  *
4092  * You must call this function before any other functions in
4093  * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
4094  * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
4095  *
4096  * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4097  *
4098  * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
4099  */
4100 int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4101 
4102 /**
4103  * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
4104  * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
4105  * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
4106  *	(full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
4107  */
4108 struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
4109 	int throughput;
4110 	int blink_time;
4111 };
4112 
4113 /**
4114  * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
4115  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
4116  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
4117  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
4118  *	interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
4119  */
4120 enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
4121 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO		= BIT(0),
4122 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK		= BIT(1),
4123 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED	= BIT(2),
4124 };
4125 
4126 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4127 const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4128 const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4129 const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4130 const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4131 const char *
4132 __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4133 				   unsigned int flags,
4134 				   const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4135 				   unsigned int blink_table_len);
4136 #endif
4137 /**
4138  * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
4139  *
4140  * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4141  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4142  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4143  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4144  *
4145  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4146  *
4147  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4148  */
4149 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4150 {
4151 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4152 	return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
4153 #else
4154 	return NULL;
4155 #endif
4156 }
4157 
4158 /**
4159  * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
4160  *
4161  * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4162  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4163  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4164  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4165  *
4166  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4167  *
4168  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4169  */
4170 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4171 {
4172 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4173 	return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
4174 #else
4175 	return NULL;
4176 #endif
4177 }
4178 
4179 /**
4180  * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
4181  *
4182  * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4183  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4184  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4185  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4186  *
4187  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4188  *
4189  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4190  */
4191 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4192 {
4193 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4194 	return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
4195 #else
4196 	return NULL;
4197 #endif
4198 }
4199 
4200 /**
4201  * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
4202  *
4203  * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4204  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4205  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4206  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4207  *
4208  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4209  *
4210  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4211  */
4212 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4213 {
4214 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4215 	return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
4216 #else
4217 	return NULL;
4218 #endif
4219 }
4220 
4221 /**
4222  * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
4223  * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
4224  * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
4225  * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
4226  * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
4227  *
4228  * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
4229  * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
4230  *
4231  * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
4232  */
4233 static inline const char *
4234 ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
4235 				 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4236 				 unsigned int blink_table_len)
4237 {
4238 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4239 	return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
4240 						  blink_table_len);
4241 #else
4242 	return NULL;
4243 #endif
4244 }
4245 
4246 /**
4247  * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
4248  *
4249  * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
4250  * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
4251  *
4252  * @hw: the hardware to unregister
4253  */
4254 void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4255 
4256 /**
4257  * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
4258  *
4259  * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
4260  * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
4261  * before calling this function.
4262  *
4263  * @hw: the hardware to free
4264  */
4265 void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4266 
4267 /**
4268  * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
4269  *
4270  * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
4271  * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
4272  * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
4273  * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
4274  * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
4275  * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
4276  *
4277  * @hw: the hardware to restart
4278  */
4279 void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4280 
4281 /**
4282  * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
4283  *
4284  * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4285  * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4286  * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4287  * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4288  * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4289  *
4290  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4291  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4292  * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4293  * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4294  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4295  *
4296  * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
4297  *
4298  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4299  * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4300  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4301  * @napi: the NAPI context
4302  */
4303 void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4304 		       struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
4305 
4306 /**
4307  * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
4308  *
4309  * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4310  * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4311  * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4312  * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4313  * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4314  *
4315  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4316  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4317  * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4318  * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4319  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4320  *
4321  * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
4322  *
4323  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4324  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4325  */
4326 static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
4327 {
4328 	ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
4329 }
4330 
4331 /**
4332  * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
4333  *
4334  * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
4335  * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4336  *
4337  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
4338  * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
4339  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4340  *
4341  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4342  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4343  */
4344 void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
4345 
4346 /**
4347  * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
4348  *
4349  * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
4350  * (internally disables bottom halves).
4351  *
4352  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
4353  * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4354  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4355  *
4356  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4357  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4358  */
4359 static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4360 				   struct sk_buff *skb)
4361 {
4362 	local_bh_disable();
4363 	ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
4364 	local_bh_enable();
4365 }
4366 
4367 /**
4368  * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
4369  *
4370  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
4371  * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
4372  * entering/leaving PS mode.
4373  *
4374  * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
4375  *
4376  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
4377  * each other.
4378  *
4379  * @sta: currently connected sta
4380  * @start: start or stop PS
4381  *
4382  * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
4383  */
4384 int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
4385 
4386 /**
4387  * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4388  *                                  (in process context)
4389  *
4390  * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4391  * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4392  * applies.
4393  *
4394  * @sta: currently connected sta
4395  * @start: start or stop PS
4396  *
4397  * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
4398  */
4399 static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4400 						  bool start)
4401 {
4402 	int ret;
4403 
4404 	local_bh_disable();
4405 	ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4406 	local_bh_enable();
4407 
4408 	return ret;
4409 }
4410 
4411 /**
4412  * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4413  * @sta: currently connected station
4414  *
4415  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4416  * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4417  * connected station was received.
4418  * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4419  * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4420  * be serialized.
4421  */
4422 void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4423 
4424 /**
4425  * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4426  * @sta: currently connected station
4427  * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4428  *
4429  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4430  * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4431  * from a connected station was received.
4432  * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4433  * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4434  * serialized.
4435  * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
4436  * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
4437  * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
4438  * checks.
4439  */
4440 void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4441 
4442 /*
4443  * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4444  * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4445  */
4446 #define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM	ALIGN(14, 4)
4447 
4448 /**
4449  * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
4450  * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
4451  * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4452  * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
4453  *
4454  * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
4455  * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4456  * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
4457  *
4458  * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4459  * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4460  * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4461  * call! Beware of the locking!)
4462  *
4463  * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4464  * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4465  * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4466  * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4467  * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4468  * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4469  *
4470  * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4471  * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4472  * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4473  * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4474  * use this API.
4475  */
4476 void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4477 				u8 tid, bool buffered);
4478 
4479 /**
4480  * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4481  *
4482  * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
4483  * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
4484  * rate selection table for the station entry.
4485  *
4486  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4487  * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
4488  * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
4489  * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
4490  * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
4491  */
4492 void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4493 			    struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4494 			    struct sk_buff *skb,
4495 			    struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4496 			    int max_rates);
4497 
4498 /**
4499  * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station
4500  *
4501  * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput
4502  * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can
4503  * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station
4504  * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic
4505  * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause
4506  * slow stations to starve).
4507  *
4508  * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for.
4509  * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps.
4510  */
4511 void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4512 					   u32 thr);
4513 
4514 /**
4515  * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback
4516  *
4517  * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta
4518  * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision
4519  * in updating the tx rate in data path.
4520  *
4521  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4522  * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for.
4523  * @info: tx status information
4524  */
4525 void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4526 			      struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4527 			      struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
4528 
4529 /**
4530  * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
4531  *
4532  * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
4533  * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
4534  * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
4535  *
4536  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4537  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
4538  * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
4539  * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4540  * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
4541  *
4542  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4543  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4544  */
4545 void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4546 			 struct sk_buff *skb);
4547 
4548 /**
4549  * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback
4550  *
4551  * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4552  * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not
4553  * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info.
4554  *
4555  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4556  * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4557  * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4558  *
4559  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4560  * @status: tx status information
4561  */
4562 void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4563 			     struct ieee80211_tx_status *status);
4564 
4565 /**
4566  * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
4567  *
4568  * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4569  * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
4570  * specific skbs.
4571  *
4572  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4573  * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4574  * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4575  *
4576  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4577  * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
4578  *	(NULL for multicast packets)
4579  * @info: tx status information
4580  */
4581 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4582 					     struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4583 					     struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
4584 {
4585 	struct ieee80211_tx_status status = {
4586 		.sta = sta,
4587 		.info = info,
4588 	};
4589 
4590 	ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status);
4591 }
4592 
4593 /**
4594  * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
4595  *
4596  * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
4597  *
4598  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4599  * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
4600  * for a single hardware.
4601  *
4602  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4603  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4604  */
4605 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4606 					  struct sk_buff *skb)
4607 {
4608 	local_bh_disable();
4609 	ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
4610 	local_bh_enable();
4611 }
4612 
4613 /**
4614  * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
4615  *
4616  * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
4617  * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4618  *
4619  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4620  * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4621  *
4622  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4623  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4624  */
4625 void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4626 				 struct sk_buff *skb);
4627 
4628 /**
4629  * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
4630  *
4631  * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
4632  * connected STA.
4633  *
4634  * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
4635  * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
4636  */
4637 void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
4638 
4639 #define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
4640 
4641 /**
4642  * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
4643  * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
4644  * @tim_length: size of TIM element
4645  * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
4646  *	to CSA counters.  This array can contain zero values which
4647  *	should be ignored.
4648  */
4649 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4650 	u16 tim_offset;
4651 	u16 tim_length;
4652 
4653 	u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
4654 };
4655 
4656 /**
4657  * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4658  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4659  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4660  * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4661  *	receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4662  *
4663  * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4664  * obtain the beacon template.
4665  *
4666  * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4667  * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
4668  * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
4669  * applicable, the CSA count.
4670  *
4671  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4672  *
4673  * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4674  */
4675 struct sk_buff *
4676 ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4677 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4678 			      struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
4679 
4680 /**
4681  * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4682  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4683  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4684  * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
4685  *	Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4686  * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
4687  *	(including the ID and length bytes!).
4688  *	Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4689  *
4690  * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4691  * obtain the beacon frame.
4692  *
4693  * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4694  * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
4695  * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4696  * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
4697  *
4698  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4699  *
4700  * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4701  */
4702 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4703 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4704 					 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4705 
4706 /**
4707  * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4708  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4709  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4710  *
4711  * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4712  *
4713  * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4714  */
4715 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4716 						   struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4717 {
4718 	return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
4719 }
4720 
4721 /**
4722  * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
4723  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4724  *
4725  * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
4726  * This function is called implicitly when
4727  * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
4728  * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
4729  * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
4730  *
4731  * Return: new csa counter value
4732  */
4733 u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4734 
4735 /**
4736  * ieee80211_csa_set_counter - request mac80211 to set csa counter
4737  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4738  * @counter: the new value for the counter
4739  *
4740  * The csa counter can be changed by the device, this API should be
4741  * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211.
4742  *
4743  * It should never be used together with ieee80211_csa_update_counter(),
4744  * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value.
4745  */
4746 void ieee80211_csa_set_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter);
4747 
4748 /**
4749  * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
4750  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4751  *
4752  * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
4753  * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
4754  * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
4755  */
4756 void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4757 
4758 /**
4759  * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
4760  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4761  *
4762  * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
4763  */
4764 bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4765 
4766 
4767 /**
4768  * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
4769  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4770  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4771  *
4772  * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4773  * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
4774  *
4775  * Can only be called in AP mode.
4776  *
4777  * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
4778  */
4779 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4780 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4781 
4782 /**
4783  * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
4784  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4785  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4786  *
4787  * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
4788  * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4789  * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
4790  *
4791  * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4792  * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
4793  *
4794  * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
4795  */
4796 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4797 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4798 
4799 /**
4800  * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
4801  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4802  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4803  * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set
4804  *	if at all possible
4805  *
4806  * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
4807  * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4808  * BSSID and address is used.
4809  *
4810  * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the
4811  * returned packet will be QoS NDP.
4812  *
4813  * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4814  * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
4815  *
4816  * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
4817  */
4818 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4819 				       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4820 				       bool qos_ok);
4821 
4822 /**
4823  * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4824  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4825  * @src_addr: source MAC address
4826  * @ssid: SSID buffer
4827  * @ssid_len: length of SSID
4828  * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
4829  *
4830  * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4831  * hardware.
4832  *
4833  * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
4834  */
4835 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4836 				       const u8 *src_addr,
4837 				       const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
4838 				       size_t tailroom);
4839 
4840 /**
4841  * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
4842  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4843  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4844  * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4845  * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
4846  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4847  * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
4848  *
4849  * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4850  * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4851  * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4852  * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
4853  */
4854 void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4855 		       const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
4856 		       const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
4857 		       struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
4858 
4859 /**
4860  * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
4861  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4862  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4863  * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4864  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4865  *
4866  * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4867  * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4868  * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
4869  *
4870  * Return: The duration.
4871  */
4872 __le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4873 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
4874 			      const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
4875 
4876 /**
4877  * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
4878  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4879  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4880  * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4881  * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
4882  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4883  * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
4884  *
4885  * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4886  * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4887  * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4888  * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
4889  */
4890 void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4891 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4892 			     const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
4893 			     const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
4894 			     struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
4895 
4896 /**
4897  * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
4898  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4899  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4900  * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4901  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4902  *
4903  * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4904  * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4905  * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
4906  *
4907  * Return: The duration.
4908  */
4909 __le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4910 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4911 				    size_t frame_len,
4912 				    const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
4913 
4914 /**
4915  * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
4916  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4917  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4918  * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
4919  * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
4920  * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
4921  *
4922  * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
4923  * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
4924  *
4925  * Return: The duration.
4926  */
4927 __le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4928 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4929 					enum nl80211_band band,
4930 					size_t frame_len,
4931 					struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
4932 
4933 /**
4934  * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
4935  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4936  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4937  *
4938  * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
4939  * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
4940  * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
4941  * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
4942  * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
4943  *
4944  * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
4945  * frames are available.
4946  *
4947  * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
4948  * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
4949  * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
4950  * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
4951  * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
4952  * use common code for all beacons.
4953  */
4954 struct sk_buff *
4955 ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4956 
4957 /**
4958  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
4959  *
4960  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
4961  *
4962  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4963  * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4964  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4965  */
4966 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4967 			       u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4968 
4969 /**
4970  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
4971  *
4972  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
4973  * from the given packet.
4974  *
4975  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4976  * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
4977  *	with this P1K
4978  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4979  */
4980 static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4981 					  struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
4982 {
4983 	struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
4984 	const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
4985 	u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
4986 
4987 	ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
4988 }
4989 
4990 /**
4991  * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
4992  *
4993  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
4994  * and transmitter address.
4995  *
4996  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4997  * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
4998  * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4999  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5000  */
5001 void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5002 			       const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5003 
5004 /**
5005  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
5006  *
5007  * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
5008  * in the packet.
5009  *
5010  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5011  * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
5012  *	encrypted with this key
5013  * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
5014  */
5015 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5016 			    struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
5017 
5018 /**
5019  * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
5020  *
5021  * @pos: start of crypto header
5022  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5023  * @pn: PN to add
5024  *
5025  * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
5026  * the packet payload)
5027  *
5028  * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
5029  * point to the crypto header)
5030  */
5031 u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
5032 
5033 /**
5034  * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
5035  *
5036  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5037  * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5038  *	the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5039  *	CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5040  * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
5041  *
5042  * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
5043  * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
5044  * by the device and not by mac80211.
5045  *
5046  * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5047  * can be done concurrently.
5048  */
5049 void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5050 			      int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5051 
5052 /**
5053  * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
5054  *
5055  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5056  * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5057  *	the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5058  *	CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5059  * @seq: new sequence data
5060  *
5061  * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
5062  * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
5063  * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
5064  * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
5065  *
5066  * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5067  * can be done concurrently.
5068  */
5069 void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5070 			      int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5071 
5072 /**
5073  * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
5074  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5075  *
5076  * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
5077  * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
5078  * instead assumed to have been removed already.
5079  *
5080  * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
5081  * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
5082  */
5083 void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5084 
5085 /**
5086  * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
5087  * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
5088  * @keyconf: new key data
5089  *
5090  * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
5091  * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
5092  * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
5093  *
5094  * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
5095  * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
5096  * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
5097  * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
5098  *
5099  * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
5100  * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
5101  * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
5102  * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
5103  * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
5104  * of the reconfiguration.
5105  *
5106  * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
5107  * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
5108  *
5109  * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
5110  * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
5111  * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
5112  * the key that's being replaced.
5113  */
5114 struct ieee80211_key_conf *
5115 ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5116 			struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5117 
5118 /**
5119  * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
5120  * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
5121  * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
5122  * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
5123  * @gfp: allocation flags
5124  */
5125 void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
5126 				const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
5127 
5128 /**
5129  * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
5130  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5131  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5132  *
5133  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5134  */
5135 void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5136 
5137 /**
5138  * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
5139  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5140  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5141  *
5142  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5143  */
5144 void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5145 
5146 /**
5147  * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
5148  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5149  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5150  *
5151  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5152  *
5153  * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
5154  */
5155 
5156 int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5157 
5158 /**
5159  * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
5160  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5161  *
5162  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5163  */
5164 void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5165 
5166 /**
5167  * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
5168  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5169  *
5170  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5171  */
5172 void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5173 
5174 /**
5175  * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
5176  *
5177  * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
5178  * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
5179  * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
5180  * any context, including hardirq context.
5181  *
5182  * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
5183  * @info: information about the completed scan
5184  */
5185 void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5186 			      struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
5187 
5188 /**
5189  * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
5190  *
5191  * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
5192  * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
5193  *
5194  * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5195  */
5196 void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5197 
5198 /**
5199  * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
5200  *
5201  * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
5202  * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
5203  * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
5204  * while associating, for instance.
5205  *
5206  * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5207  */
5208 void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5209 
5210 /**
5211  * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
5212  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
5213  *	been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
5214  *	reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
5215  *	interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
5216  *	haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5217  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
5218  *	interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5219  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
5220  */
5221 enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
5222 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL	= 0,
5223 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL	= BIT(0),
5224 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE	= BIT(1),
5225 };
5226 
5227 /**
5228  * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
5229  *
5230  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5231  * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
5232  * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
5233  * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5234  *
5235  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5236  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5237  * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5238  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5239  */
5240 void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5241 				  void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5242 						   struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5243 				  void *data);
5244 
5245 /**
5246  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
5247  *
5248  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5249  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5250  * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
5251  * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
5252  * be used.
5253  * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5254  *
5255  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5256  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5257  * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5258  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5259  */
5260 static inline void
5261 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5262 				    void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5263 						     struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5264 				    void *data)
5265 {
5266 	ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
5267 				     iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
5268 				     iterator, data);
5269 }
5270 
5271 /**
5272  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
5273  *
5274  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5275  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5276  * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5277  * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
5278  * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5279  *
5280  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5281  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5282  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5283  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5284  */
5285 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5286 						u32 iter_flags,
5287 						void (*iterator)(void *data,
5288 						    u8 *mac,
5289 						    struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5290 						void *data);
5291 
5292 /**
5293  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
5294  *
5295  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5296  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5297  * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
5298  *
5299  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5300  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5301  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5302  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5303  */
5304 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5305 					      u32 iter_flags,
5306 					      void (*iterator)(void *data,
5307 						u8 *mac,
5308 						struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5309 					      void *data);
5310 
5311 /**
5312  * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
5313  *
5314  * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
5315  * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
5316  * function for them.
5317  * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5318  *
5319  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5320  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5321  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5322  */
5323 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5324 				       void (*iterator)(void *data,
5325 						struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
5326 				       void *data);
5327 /**
5328  * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5329  *
5330  * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
5331  * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
5332  *
5333  * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5334  * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
5335  */
5336 void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
5337 
5338 /**
5339  * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5340  *
5341  * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
5342  * workqueue.
5343  *
5344  * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5345  * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
5346  * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
5347  */
5348 void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5349 				  struct delayed_work *dwork,
5350 				  unsigned long delay);
5351 
5352 /**
5353  * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
5354  * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
5355  * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5356  * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
5357  *
5358  * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
5359  *
5360  * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5361  * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5362  * will be managed by the mac80211.
5363  */
5364 int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
5365 				  u16 timeout);
5366 
5367 /**
5368  * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
5369  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5370  * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5371  * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5372  *
5373  * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5374  * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
5375  * from any context.
5376  */
5377 void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5378 				      u16 tid);
5379 
5380 /**
5381  * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
5382  * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
5383  * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
5384  *
5385  * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
5386  *
5387  * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5388  * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5389  * will be managed by the mac80211.
5390  */
5391 int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
5392 
5393 /**
5394  * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
5395  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5396  * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5397  * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
5398  *
5399  * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5400  * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
5401  * can be called from any context.
5402  */
5403 void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5404 				     u16 tid);
5405 
5406 /**
5407  * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
5408  *
5409  * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
5410  * @addr: station's address
5411  *
5412  * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5413  *
5414  * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5415  * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5416  */
5417 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5418 					 const u8 *addr);
5419 
5420 /**
5421  * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
5422  *
5423  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5424  * @addr: remote station's address
5425  * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
5426  *
5427  * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5428  *
5429  * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5430  * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5431  *
5432  * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
5433  *      the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
5434  *      We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
5435  *      logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
5436  *      BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
5437  *      In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
5438  *      is not reliable.
5439  *
5440  * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
5441  */
5442 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5443 					       const u8 *addr,
5444 					       const u8 *localaddr);
5445 
5446 /**
5447  * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
5448  * @hw: the hardware
5449  * @pubsta: the station
5450  * @block: whether to block or unblock
5451  *
5452  * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
5453  * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
5454  * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
5455  * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
5456  * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
5457  *
5458  * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
5459  * manner.
5460  *
5461  * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
5462  * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
5463  * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
5464  * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
5465  * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
5466  * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
5467  * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
5468  * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
5469  * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
5470  * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
5471  * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
5472  * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
5473  * woke up while blocked or not.
5474  */
5475 void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5476 			       struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
5477 
5478 /**
5479  * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
5480  * @pubsta: the station
5481  *
5482  * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
5483  * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
5484  * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
5485  * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
5486  *
5487  * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
5488  * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
5489  * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
5490  * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
5491  *
5492  * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
5493  *     driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
5494  *     you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
5495  *     and restore the _irqsafe version!
5496  */
5497 void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
5498 
5499 /**
5500  * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
5501  * @pubsta: the station
5502  * @tid: the tid of the NDP
5503  *
5504  * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
5505  * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
5506  * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
5507  * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
5508  * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
5509  * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
5510  * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
5511  * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
5512  * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
5513  * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
5514  * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
5515  * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
5516  * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
5517  * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
5518  */
5519 void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
5520 
5521 /**
5522  * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid
5523  *
5524  * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver can call
5525  * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of
5526  * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule
5527  * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness.
5528  *
5529  * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent
5530  * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not
5531  * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the
5532  * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame
5533  * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission
5534  * attempts.
5535  *
5536  * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or
5537  * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available.
5538  * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of
5539  * them to 0.
5540  *
5541  * @pubsta: the station
5542  * @tid: the TID to register airtime for
5543  * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec)
5544  * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec)
5545  */
5546 void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5547 				    u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime);
5548 
5549 /**
5550  * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
5551  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5552  * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5553  * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5554  * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5555  *
5556  * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5557  * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5558  * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
5559  * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
5560  * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
5561  * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
5562  *
5563  * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
5564  * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
5565  * set_key callback.
5566  */
5567 void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5568 			 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5569 			 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5570 				      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5571 				      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5572 				      struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5573 				      void *data),
5574 			 void *iter_data);
5575 
5576 /**
5577  * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
5578  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5579  * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5580  * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5581  * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5582  *
5583  * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5584  * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5585  * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
5586  * in removal process will be skipped.
5587  *
5588  * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
5589  * and thus iter must be atomic.
5590  */
5591 void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5592 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5593 			     void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5594 					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5595 					  struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5596 					  struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5597 					  void *data),
5598 			     void *iter_data);
5599 
5600 /**
5601  * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
5602  * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5603  * @iter: iterator function
5604  * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
5605  *
5606  * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
5607  * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
5608  * places while calling into the driver.
5609  *
5610  * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
5611  * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
5612  * removed.
5613  *
5614  * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
5615  * before the restart are considered already present so will be
5616  * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
5617  * or not.
5618  */
5619 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
5620 	struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5621 	void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5622 		     struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
5623 		     void *data),
5624 	void *iter_data);
5625 
5626 /**
5627  * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5628  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5629  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5630  *
5631  * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5632  * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
5633  * information. This function must only be called from within the
5634  * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
5635  * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
5636  * %NULL.
5637  *
5638  * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
5639  */
5640 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5641 					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5642 
5643 /**
5644  * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
5645  *
5646  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5647  *
5648  * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
5649  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
5650  * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
5651  */
5652 void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5653 
5654 /**
5655  * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
5656  *
5657  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5658  *
5659  * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
5660  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
5661  * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
5662  * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
5663  * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
5664  *
5665  * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
5666  * without connection recovery attempts.
5667  */
5668 void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5669 
5670 /**
5671  * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
5672  *
5673  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5674  *
5675  * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
5676  * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
5677  * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
5678  * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
5679  * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
5680  *
5681  * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
5682  * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
5683  * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
5684  * disconnect normally later.
5685  *
5686  * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
5687  * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
5688  * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
5689  * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
5690  */
5691 void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5692 
5693 /**
5694  * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
5695  *	rssi threshold triggered
5696  *
5697  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5698  * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
5699  * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available
5700  * @gfp: context flags
5701  *
5702  * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
5703  * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
5704  * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
5705  */
5706 void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5707 			       enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
5708 			       s32 rssi_level,
5709 			       gfp_t gfp);
5710 
5711 /**
5712  * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
5713  *
5714  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5715  * @gfp: context flags
5716  */
5717 void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
5718 
5719 /**
5720  * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
5721  *
5722  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5723  */
5724 void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5725 
5726 /**
5727  * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
5728  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5729  * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
5730  *
5731  * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
5732  * and wake up the suspended queues.
5733  */
5734 void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
5735 
5736 /**
5737  * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
5738  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5739  * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
5740  *
5741  * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
5742  * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
5743  * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
5744  */
5745 void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5746 			    enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
5747 
5748 /**
5749  * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
5750  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5751  */
5752 void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5753 
5754 /**
5755  * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
5756  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5757  */
5758 void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5759 
5760 /**
5761  * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
5762  *
5763  * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
5764  * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
5765  * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
5766  * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
5767  * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
5768  * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
5769  *
5770  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5771  * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
5772  * @addr: & to bssid mac address
5773  */
5774 void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
5775 				  const u8 *addr);
5776 
5777 /**
5778  * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
5779  * @pubsta: station struct
5780  * @tid: the session's TID
5781  * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
5782  *	assumed to be out of the window after the call
5783  * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
5784  * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
5785  *
5786  * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
5787  * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
5788  * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
5789  * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
5790  */
5791 void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5792 					  u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
5793 					  u16 received_mpdus);
5794 
5795 /**
5796  * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
5797  *
5798  * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
5799  * buffer.
5800  *
5801  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5802  * @ra: the peer's destination address
5803  * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
5804  * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
5805  */
5806 void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
5807 
5808 /**
5809  * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work
5810  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5811  * @addr: station mac address
5812  * @tid: the rx tid
5813  */
5814 void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr,
5815 				 unsigned int tid);
5816 
5817 /**
5818  * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
5819  *
5820  * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5821  * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5822  * reordering.
5823  *
5824  * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5825  * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
5826  *
5827  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5828  * @addr: station mac address
5829  * @tid: the rx tid
5830  */
5831 static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5832 						      const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
5833 {
5834 	if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
5835 		return;
5836 	ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid);
5837 }
5838 
5839 /**
5840  * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
5841  *
5842  * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5843  * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5844  * reordering.
5845  *
5846  * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5847  * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
5848  *
5849  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5850  * @addr: station mac address
5851  * @tid: the rx tid
5852  */
5853 static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5854 						     const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
5855 {
5856 	if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
5857 		return;
5858 	ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS);
5859 }
5860 
5861 /**
5862  * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout
5863  *
5864  * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx
5865  * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer.
5866  *
5867  * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa.
5868  *
5869  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5870  * @addr: station mac address
5871  * @tid: the rx tid
5872  */
5873 void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5874 				   const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid);
5875 
5876 /* Rate control API */
5877 
5878 /**
5879  * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
5880  *
5881  * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
5882  * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
5883  * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
5884  * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
5885  *	to be filled in
5886  * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
5887  *	which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
5888  *	used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
5889  * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
5890  *	RTS threshold
5891  * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
5892  *	if the selected rate supports it
5893  * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
5894  * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
5895  * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
5896  */
5897 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
5898 	struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
5899 	struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
5900 	struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
5901 	struct sk_buff *skb;
5902 	struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
5903 	bool rts, short_preamble;
5904 	u32 rate_idx_mask;
5905 	u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
5906 	bool bss;
5907 };
5908 
5909 /**
5910  * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities
5911  */
5912 enum rate_control_capabilities {
5913 	/**
5914 	 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW:
5915 	 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable)
5916 	 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains
5917 	 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has,
5918 	 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us.
5919 	 */
5920 	RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0),
5921 };
5922 
5923 struct rate_control_ops {
5924 	unsigned long capa;
5925 	const char *name;
5926 	void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir);
5927 	void (*free)(void *priv);
5928 
5929 	void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
5930 	void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5931 			  struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
5932 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
5933 	void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5934 			    struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
5935 			    struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5936 			    u32 changed);
5937 	void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5938 			 void *priv_sta);
5939 
5940 	void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv,
5941 			      struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5942 			      void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st);
5943 	void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5944 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5945 			  struct sk_buff *skb);
5946 	void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5947 			 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
5948 
5949 	void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
5950 				struct dentry *dir);
5951 	void (*remove_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta);
5952 
5953 	u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
5954 };
5955 
5956 static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5957 				 enum nl80211_band band,
5958 				 int index)
5959 {
5960 	return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
5961 }
5962 
5963 static inline s8
5964 rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5965 		  struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5966 {
5967 	int i;
5968 
5969 	for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5970 		if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5971 			return i;
5972 
5973 	/* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
5974 	WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
5975 
5976 	/* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
5977 	return 0;
5978 }
5979 
5980 static inline
5981 bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5982 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5983 {
5984 	unsigned int i;
5985 
5986 	for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5987 		if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5988 			return true;
5989 	return false;
5990 }
5991 
5992 /**
5993  * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
5994  *
5995  * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
5996  * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
5997  * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
5998  * the most recent rate control module decision.
5999  *
6000  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6001  * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
6002  * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
6003  */
6004 int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6005 			   struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
6006 			   struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
6007 
6008 int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6009 void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6010 
6011 static inline bool
6012 conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6013 {
6014 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
6015 }
6016 
6017 static inline bool
6018 conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6019 {
6020 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6021 	       conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6022 }
6023 
6024 static inline bool
6025 conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6026 {
6027 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6028 	       conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6029 }
6030 
6031 static inline bool
6032 conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6033 {
6034 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
6035 }
6036 
6037 static inline bool
6038 conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6039 {
6040 	return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
6041 		(conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
6042 		(conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
6043 }
6044 
6045 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
6046 ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
6047 {
6048 	if (p2p) {
6049 		switch (type) {
6050 		case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
6051 			return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
6052 		case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
6053 			return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
6054 		default:
6055 			break;
6056 		}
6057 	}
6058 	return type;
6059 }
6060 
6061 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
6062 ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
6063 {
6064 	return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
6065 }
6066 
6067 /**
6068  * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
6069  *
6070  * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6071  * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
6072  * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
6073  *
6074  * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
6075  * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
6076  * matching GroupId management frame.
6077  * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
6078  */
6079 void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6080 				const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
6081 
6082 void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6083 				   int rssi_min_thold,
6084 				   int rssi_max_thold);
6085 
6086 void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6087 
6088 /**
6089  * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
6090  *
6091  * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6092  *
6093  * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
6094  *
6095  * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
6096  * applicable.
6097  */
6098 int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6099 
6100 /**
6101  * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
6102  * @vif: virtual interface
6103  * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
6104  * @gfp: allocation flags
6105  *
6106  * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
6107  */
6108 void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6109 				    struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
6110 				    gfp_t gfp);
6111 
6112 /**
6113  * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
6114  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6115  * @vif: virtual interface
6116  * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
6117  * @band: the band to transmit on
6118  * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
6119  *
6120  * Note: must be called under RCU lock
6121  */
6122 bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6123 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
6124 			      int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
6125 
6126 /**
6127  * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
6128  *
6129  * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
6130  * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
6131  *
6132  * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
6133  *
6134  * private:
6135  *
6136  * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
6137  * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
6138  */
6139 struct ieee80211_noa_data {
6140 	u32 next_tsf;
6141 	bool has_next_tsf;
6142 
6143 	u8 absent;
6144 
6145 	u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6146 	struct {
6147 		u32 start;
6148 		u32 duration;
6149 		u32 interval;
6150 	} desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6151 };
6152 
6153 /**
6154  * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
6155  *
6156  * @attr: P2P NoA IE
6157  * @data: NoA tracking data
6158  * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6159  *
6160  * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
6161  */
6162 int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
6163 			    struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6164 
6165 /**
6166  * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
6167  *
6168  * @data: NoA tracking data
6169  * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6170  */
6171 void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6172 
6173 /**
6174  * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
6175  * @vif: virtual interface
6176  * @peer: the peer's destination address
6177  * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
6178  * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
6179  * @gfp: allocation flags
6180  *
6181  * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
6182  */
6183 void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
6184 				 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
6185 				 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
6186 
6187 /**
6188  * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
6189  *
6190  * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
6191  * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
6192  * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
6193  * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
6194  * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
6195  * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
6196  *
6197  * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
6198  * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
6199  * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6200  *
6201  * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
6202  * @tid: the TID to reserve
6203  *
6204  * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
6205  */
6206 int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6207 
6208 /**
6209  * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
6210  *
6211  * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
6212  * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
6213  * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
6214  *
6215  * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
6216  * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
6217  * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6218  *
6219  * @sta: the station
6220  * @tid: the TID to unreserve
6221  */
6222 void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6223 
6224 /**
6225  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6226  *
6227  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6228  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6229  *	ieee80211_next_txq()
6230  *
6231  * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
6232  *
6233  * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section,
6234  * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in
6235  * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by by RCU and thus the
6236  * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call
6237  * but for the duration of the frame handling.
6238  * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method,
6239  * rcu_read_lock() is already held.
6240  */
6241 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6242 				     struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6243 
6244 /**
6245  * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from
6246  *
6247  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6248  * @ac: AC number to return packets from.
6249  *
6250  * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq
6251  * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the
6252  * driver has finished scheduling it.
6253  */
6254 struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6255 
6256 /**
6257  * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs
6258  *
6259  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6260  * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for
6261  *
6262  * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq().
6263  * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently.
6264  */
6265 void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6266 
6267 /* (deprecated) */
6268 static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac)
6269 {
6270 }
6271 
6272 void __ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6273 			      struct ieee80211_txq *txq, bool force);
6274 
6275 /**
6276  * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission
6277  *
6278  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6279  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6280  *
6281  * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled,
6282  * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered.
6283  *
6284  * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for
6285  * this TXQ internally.
6286  */
6287 static inline void
6288 ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6289 {
6290 	__ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, true);
6291 }
6292 
6293 /**
6294  * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq()
6295  *
6296  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6297  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6298  * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets.
6299  *
6300  * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ
6301  * internally.
6302  */
6303 static inline void
6304 ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6305 		     bool force)
6306 {
6307 	__ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, force);
6308 }
6309 
6310 /**
6311  * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit
6312  *
6313  * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by
6314  * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime
6315  * fairness accounting without going using the scheduling order enfored by
6316  * next_txq().
6317  *
6318  * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to
6319  * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have
6320  * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will
6321  * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit
6322  * again.
6323  *
6324  * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be
6325  * aligned aginst driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates
6326  * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry
6327  * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this
6328  * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets
6329  * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq().
6330  *
6331  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6332  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6333  */
6334 bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6335 				struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6336 
6337 /**
6338  * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
6339  *
6340  * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
6341  * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
6342  * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
6343  *
6344  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6345  * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
6346  * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
6347  */
6348 void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6349 			     unsigned long *frame_cnt,
6350 			     unsigned long *byte_cnt);
6351 
6352 /**
6353  * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
6354  *
6355  * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
6356  * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6357  *
6358  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6359  * @inst_id: the local instance id
6360  * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
6361  * @gfp: allocation flags
6362  */
6363 void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6364 				   u8 inst_id,
6365 				   enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
6366 				   gfp_t gfp);
6367 
6368 /**
6369  * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
6370  *
6371  * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
6372  * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
6373  * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6374  *
6375  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6376  * @match: match event information
6377  * @gfp: allocation flags
6378  */
6379 void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6380 			      struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
6381 			      gfp_t gfp);
6382 
6383 #endif /* MAC80211_H */
6384